FCC ID: AZ489FT4918 Portable 2-Way Radio

 

6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 1 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM RF ENERGY EXPOSURE AND PRODUCT SAFETY GUIDE FOR PORTABLE TWO-WAY RADIOS ATTENTION!

Before using this radio, read this guide which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for compliance with applicable standards and regulations. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2007 2013 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, U.S.A.

*NNTN7223F*

NNTN7223F 6881095C98-J English 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 2 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information and Operational Instructions for Occupational Use NOTICE: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet the occupational limits in FCC and International standards. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population consumer use. This two-way radio uses electromagnetic energy in the radio frequency (RF) spectrum to provide communications between two or more users over a distance. It uses radio frequency (RF) energy or radio waves to send and receive calls. RF energy is one form of electromagnetic energy. Other forms include, but are not limited to, sunlight and x-rays. RF energy, however, should not be confused with these other forms of electromagnetic energy, which when used improperly, can cause biological damage. Very high levels of x-rays, for example, can damage tissues and genetic material. Experts in science, engineering, medicine, health, and industry work with organizations to develop standards for safe exposure to RF energy. These standards provide recommended levels of RF exposure for both workers and the general public. These recommended RF exposure levels include substantial margins of protection. All Motorola two-way radios are designed, manufactured, and tested to ensure they meet government-established RF exposure levels. In addition, manufacturers also recommend specific operating instructions to users of two-way radios. These instructions are important because they inform users about RF energy exposure and provide simple procedures on how to control it. English 2 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 3 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Please refer to the following websites for more information on what RF energy exposure is and how to control your exposure to assure compliance with established RF exposure limits:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html www.who.int/en/

www.motorolasolutions.com/rfhealth Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Regulations When two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, the FCC requires users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. Exposure awareness can be facilitated by the use of a product label directing users to specific user awareness information. Your Motorola two-way radio has a RF Exposure Product Label. Also, your Motorola user manual, or separate safety booklet includes information and operating instructions required to control your RF exposure and to satisfy compliance requirements. Compliance with RF Exposure Standards Your Motorola two-way radio is designed and tested to comply with a number of national and International standards and guidelines (listed below) for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. This radio complies with the IEEE (FCC) and ICNIRP exposure limits for occupational/controlled RF exposure environments at operating duty factors of up to 50% talk-50%

listen and is approved for occupational use only. In terms of measuring RF energy for compliance with these exposure guidelines, your radio generates measurable RF energy only while it is transmitting (during talking), not when it is receiving (listening) or in standby mode. 3 English 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 4 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM NOTE: The approved batteries, supplied with this radio, are rated for a 5-5-90 duty factor (5% talk-5% listen-90% standby) even though this radio complies with FCC occupational exposure limits and may operate at duty factors of up to 50% talk. Your Motorola two-way radio complies with the following RF energy exposure standards and guidelines:

United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR et seq. & FCC, OET Bulletin 65 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1 International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6 & Industry Canada RSS-102 Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications Standard et seq. ANATEL ANNEX to Resolution No. 303 et seq. RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Two-Way Radio Operations To control your exposure and ensure compliance with the occupational/controlled environment exposure limits, always adhere to the following procedures. DO NOT remove the RF Exposure Label from the device. User awareness instructions should accompany device when transferred to other users. English 4 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 5 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Two-Way Radio Operation Transmit no more than the rated duty factor of 50% of the time. To transmit

(talk), push the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button. To receive calls, release the PTT button. The PTT button may reside on the radio itself or may be hosted on approved wired or wireless (for example, a Bluetooth enabled remote Push-to-Talk button) accessories. Transmitting 50% of the time, or less, is important because this radio generates measurable RF energy exposure only when transmitting (in terms of measuring for standards compliance). In front of the face. Hold the radio in a vertical position with the microphone (and other parts of the radio including the antenna) at least one inch (2.5 centimeters) away from the nose or lips. Keeping the radio at a proper distance is important to ensure compliance. NOTE: RF exposures decrease with increasing distance from the antenna. Body Worn Operation. When worn on the body, always place the radio in a Motorola-approved clip, holder, holster, case, or body harness for this product. Using approved body-worn accessories is important because the use of non-

Motorola-approved accessories may result in exposure levels, which exceed the occupational/controlled environment RF exposure limits. Use only Motorola-approved supplied or replacement antennas, batteries, and audio accessories. Use of non-Motorola-approved antennas, batteries, and wired or wireless accessories may exceed the applicable RF exposure guidelines (iEEE, ICNIRP or FCC). For a list of Motorola-approved accessories for your radio model, visit the following website: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/governmentandenterprise 5 English 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 6 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility NOTE: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Aircraft When instructed to do so, turn off your radio when on board an aircraft. Any use of a radio must be in accordance with applicable regulations per airline crew instructions. Medical Devices Pacemakers The Advanced Medical Technology Association (AdvaMed) recommends that a minimum separation of 6 inches (15 centimeters) be maintained between a handheld wireless radio and a pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with those of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Persons with pacemakers should:

ALWAYS keep the radio more than 6 inches (15 centimeters) from their pacemaker when the radio is turned ON. Not carry the radio in the breast pocket. Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. Turn the radio OFF immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. English 6 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 7 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Hearing Aids Some digital wireless radios may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Use of Communication Devices While Driving Always check the laws and regulations on the use of radios in the areas where you drive. Give full attention to driving and to the road. Use hands-free operation, if available. Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call, if driving conditions or regulations so require. 7 English 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 8 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Acoustic Safety Exposure to loud noises from any source for extended periods of time may temporarily or permanently affect your hearing. The louder the radio's volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be affected. Hearing damage from loud noise is sometimes undetectable at first and can have a cumulative effect. To protect your hearing:

Use the lowest volume necessary to do your job. Turn up the volume only if you are in noisy surroundings. Turn down the volume before adding headset or earpiece. Limit the amount of time you use headsets or earpieces at high volume. When using the radio without a headset or earpiece, do not place the radio's speaker directly against your ear. Operational Warnings W A R N I N G For Vehicle With Air Bags:

Refer to vehicle manufacturer's manual prior to installation of electronic equipment to avoid interference with air bag wiring. DO NOT place a portable radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a portable radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. English 8 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 9 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Operational Warnings (Continued) W A R N I N G Potentially Explosive Atmospheres

(Explosive atmospheres refers to hazard classified locations that may contain hazardous gas, vapors, or dusts.) Turn off your radio prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere unless it is a portable radio type especially qualified for use in such areas as Intrinsically Safe (for example, Factory Mutual, CSA, UL, or CENELEC). DO NOT remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres referred to above include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: "Turn off two-way radio." Obey all signs and instructions. 9 English 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 10 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Operational Cautions C a u t i o n Antennas DO NOT use any portable radio that has a damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with your skin, a minor burn can result. Batteries All batteries can cause property damage and/or bodily injury, such as burns, if a conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains touches exposed terminals. The conductive material may complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any charged battery, particularly when placing it inside a pocket, purse, or other container with metal objects. Intrinsically Safe Radio Information The Intrinsically safe approval unit refers to a product that has been approved as intrinsically safe by an approval agency (for example FM Approvals, CSA, UL, or Cenelec) and certifies that a particular product meets the Agency's applicable intrinsic safety standards for specific types of hazardous classified locations. A portable radio that has been approved for intrinsic safety will have Approval label attached to the radio to identify the unit as being Approved for specified hazardous atmospheres. This label specifies the hazardous Class/Division/Group along with the part number of the battery that must be used. The Intrinsically Safe Approval Label will be located on the portable radio unit. English 10 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 11 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Operational Cautions for Intrinsic Safe Equipment C a u t i o n DO NOT operate radio communications equipment in a hazardous atmosphere unless it is a type especially qualified (for example, FM, UL, CSA, or CENELEC approved). An explosion or fire may result. DO NOT operate a radio unit that has been approved as intrinsically safe product in a hazardous atmosphere if it has been physically damaged (for example, cracked housing). An explosion or fire may result. DO NOT replace or charge batteries in a hazardous atmosphere. Contact sparking may occur while installing or removing batteries and cause an explosion or fire. Warnings for Radios Approved as Intrinsically Safe Radios must ship from the Motorola manufacturing facility with the hazardous atmosphere capability and the intrinsic safety approval labelling (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). Radios will not be upgraded to this capability and labeled once they have been shipped to the field. A modification changes the units hardware from its original design configuration. Modifications can only be made by the original product manufacturer. 11 English 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 12 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM W A R N I N G Repair W A R N I N G DO NOT replace or change accessories in a hazardous atmosphere. Contact sparking may occur while installing or removing accessories and cause an explosion or fire. Turn the radio off before removing or installing a battery or accessory. DO NOT disassemble an intrinsically safe product in any way that exposes the internal circuits of the unit. Failure to use an intrinsically safe approved battery or Approved accessories specifically approved for the radio unit may result in the dangerously unsafe condition of an unapproved radio combination being used in a hazardous location. Unauthorized or incorrect modification of the intrinsically safe approved Product will negate the approval rating of the product. Incorrect repair or relabeling of any intrinsically safe Agency-

approved radio could adversely affect the Approval rating of the unit. Use of a radio that is not intrinsically safe in a hazardous atmosphere could result in serious injury or death. REPAIRS FOR MOTOROLA PRODUCTS WITH INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPROVAL ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER. Repairs to a Motorola FM approved radio product should only be done at a location that has been FM audited under the FM 3605 repairs and service standard. Contact Motorola for assistance regarding repairs and service of Motorola intrinsically safe equipment. English 12 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 13 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM A repair constitutes something done internally to the unit that would bring it back to its original condition. Items not considered as repairs are those in which an action is performed on a unit which does not require the outer casing of the unit to be opened in a manner that exposes the internal electrical circuits of the unit. Do Not Substitute Options or Accessories The Motorola communications equipment certified as intrinsically safe by the approving agency, (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC) is tested as a complete system which consists of the listed agency Approved portable, Approved battery, and Approved accessories or options, or both. This Approved portable and battery combination must be strictly observed. There must be no substitution of items, even if the substitute has been previously Approved with a different Motorola communications equipment unit. Approved configurations are listed by the Approving Agency (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). The Intrinsically Safe Approval Label affixed to radio refers to the intrinsically safe classification of that radio product, and the approved batteries that can be used with that system. The manual PN referenced on the Intrinsically Safe Approval Label identifies the approved Accessories and or options that can be used with that portable radio unit. Using a non-Motorola-intrinsically-safe battery and or accessory with the Motorola approved radio unit will void the intrinsically safe approval of that radio unit. 13 English 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 14 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Notes:

English 14 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 15 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM GUIA DE SEGURANA DO PRODUTO E EXPOSIO ENERGIA DE RF PARA RDIOS PORTTEIS BIDIRECIONAIS ATENO!

Antes de usar o rdio, leia este guia que contm instrues operacionais importantes para uso seguro, informaes sobre conscientizao e controle de exposio energia de radiofrequncia (RF) para conformidade com os padres e regulamentos aplicveis. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS e a letra "M"

estilizada do logotipo so marcas comerciais ou marcas registradas da Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC e so utilizadas sob licena. Todas as demais marcas registradas so de propriedade de seus respectivos proprietrios. 2007 2013 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, E.U.A.

*NNTN7223F*

NNTN7223F 6881095C98-J Portugus do Brasil 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 16 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Informaes sobre Conscientizao e Controle de Exposio RF e Instrues Operacionais para Uso Ocupacional COMUNICADO: este rdio destina-se ao uso em condies ocupacionais/

controladas, em que os usurios tm total conhecimento de sua exposio e possam exercer controle sobre sua exposio para atender aos limites ocupacionais definidos pela FCC e pelos padres internacionais. O dispositivo de rdio NO autorizado para uso pela populao em geral. Este rdio bidirecional usa energia eletromagntica no espectro de RF para fornecer comunicao distncia entre dois ou mais usurios. Ele usa energia de RF ou ondas de rdio para enviar e receber chamadas. A energia de RF uma forma de energia eletromagntica. Outras formas incluem, mas no so limitadas a, raios, raios solares e raios X. A energia de RF, entretanto, no deve ser confundida com essas outras formas de energia eletromagntica, que quando so usadas incorretamente, podem causar danos biolgicos. Nveis muito altos de raios X, por exemplo, podem danificar tecidos e material gentico. Especialistas em cincias, engenharia, medicina, sade e indstrias trabalham com organizaes para desenvolver padres de exposio segura energia de RF. Esses padres fornecem nveis recomendados de exposio RF para trabalhadores e para o pblico em geral. Os nveis recomendados de exposio RF incluem margens de segurana substanciais. Todos os rdios bidirecionais da Motorola so projetados, fabricados e testados para garantir que atendam aos nveis de exposio RF estabelecidos pelo governo. Alm disso, os fabricantes tambm recomendam instrues operacionais especficas para usurios de rdios bidirecionais. Essas instrues so importantes porque informam aos usurios sobre a exposio energia de RF e fornecem procedimentos simples sobre como controlar essa exposio. Portugus do Brasil 16 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 17 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Consulte os sites a seguir para obter mais informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF e como controlar a exposio para garantir conformidade com os limites de exposio RF estabelecidos:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html www.who.int/en/

www.motorolasolutions.com/rfhealth Regulamentos da FCC Ao usar rdios bidirecionais por motivos de trabalho, a FCC (Federal Communication Commission, comisso federal de comunicao) requer que os usurios estejam totalmente conscientes e aptos a controlar sua exposio de modo a atender s exigncias ocupacionais. A conscientizao da exposio pode ser facilitada pelo uso de uma etiqueta no produto, direcionando o usurio para informaes de conscientizao especficas do usurio. O rdio bidirecional da Motorola possui uma Etiqueta no Produto sobre Exposio RF. Alm disso, o manual do usurio da Motorola, ou folheto de segurana em separado, inclui informaes e instrues operacionais necessrias para controlar a exposio RF e atender aos requisitos de conformidade. Conformidade com os Padres de Exposio RF O rdio bidirecional da Motorola foi projetado e testado para estar em conformidade com vrios padres e com as diretrizes nacionais e internacionais (listados a seguir) para exposio de seres humanos energia eletromagntica de radiofrequncia. Este rdio est em conformidade com os limites de exposio IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, instituto de engenheiros eltricos e eletrnicos) (FCC) e ICNIRP para ambientes ocupacionais/controlados de exposio RF em fatores operacionais de trabalho de at 50% de fala e 50%

de escuta e est aprovado apenas para uso ocupacional. Para medio de energia de RF para conformidade com essas diretrizes de exposio, o rdio gera energia de RF mensurvel apenas quando est transmitindo (na fala), no quando est recebendo (escuta) ou no modo de espera. 17 Portugus do Brasil 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 18 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM NOTA: As baterias aprovadas, fornecidas com o rdio, so para um fator de trabalho 5-5-90 (5% de fala-5% de escuta-90% de espera) apesar de o rdio estar em conformidade com os limites de exposio ocupacional da FCC e poder operar em fatores de trabalho de at 50% de fala. O rdio bidirecional da Motorola est em conformidade com os seguintes padres e diretrizes de exposio de energia de RF:

Cdigo de Regulamentos Federais da FCC; 47 CFR et seq. e FCC, OET Boletim 65 IEEE C95.1 ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-ionizing Radiation Protection. comisso internacional para a proteo contra as radiaes no ionizantes) Cdigo de segurana 6 do Ministrio da Sade (Canad) e da Indstria Canadense RSS-102 Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications Standard et seq. ANEXO da ANATEL Resoluo n 303 et seq. Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle de Exposio RF e Instrues Operacionais Relacionadas a Operaes de Rdios Bidirecionais Para controlar a exposio e garantir conformidade com os limites de exposio em ambientes ocupacionais/controlados, siga sempre os procedimentos a seguir. NO remova a Etiqueta de Exposio RF do dispositivo. As instrues de conscientizao do usurio devem acompanhar o dispositivo quando transferido para outros usurios. Portugus do Brasil 18 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 19 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Operao do Rdio Bidirecional No transmitir alm do fator calculado nominal de 50% do tempo. Para transmitir (falar), pressione o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk). Para receber chamadas, solte o boto PTT. O boto PTT pode estar localizado no rdio ou em acessrios aprovados com ou sem fio (por exemplo, um boto PTT remoto compatvel com Bluetooth). importante transmitir em 50% do tempo ou menos, pois este rdio gera exposio RF mensurvel somente ao transmitir

(em termos de medio para conformidade de padres). Em frente do rosto. Segure o rdio na posio vertical com o microfone (e outras partes do rdio incluindo a antena) a, no mnimo, 2,5 centmetros de distncia do nariz e da boca. Manter o rdio distncia apropriada importante para garantir a conformidade. NOTA: quanto maior o distanciamento da antena, menores as exposies RF. Uso junto ao corpo. Ao usar o rdio junto ao corpo, coloque-o em um prendedor, suporte, suporte para cinto ou estojo para este produto aprovado pela Motorola. importante usar os acessrios aprovados para uso junto ao corpo, porque o uso de acessrios no aprovados pela Motorola pode resultar em nveis de exposio que excedem os limites de exposio RF para ambiente ocupacional/controlado. Use somente antenas, baterias e acessrios de udio fornecidos ou de substituio aprovados pela Motorola. O uso de antenas, baterias e acessrios com ou sem fio no aprovados pela Motorola, pode exceder as diretrizes aplicveis de exposio RF (IEEE, ICNIRP ou FCC). Para obter uma lista de acessrios aprovados pela Motorola para o modelo de seu rdio, acesse o site:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/governmentandenterprise 19 Portugus do Brasil 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 20 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Interferncia/Compatibilidade Eletromagntica NOTA: quase todo dispositivo eletrnico suscetvel interferncia eletromagntica (EMI) quando blindado, projetado ou de alguma forma configurado inadequadamente para compatibilidade eletromagntica. Instalaes Para evitar interferncia eletromagntica e/ou conflitos de compatibilidade, desligue o rdio em qualquer instalao onde haja avisos dizendo para faz-lo. Hospitais e casas de sade podem utilizar equipamentos sensveis energia de RF externa. Aeronaves Desligue seu rdio a bordo de aeronaves, quando orientado a faz-lo. O rdio deve ser utilizado de acordo com as instrues fornecidas pela tripulao. Equipamentos Mdicos Marca-passos A AdvaMed (Advanced Medical Technology Association) recomenda que seja mantida uma distncia mnima de 15 cm entre um rdio porttil sem fio e um marca-passo. Estas recomendaes so consistentes com as determinaes da FDA (rgo de vigilncia sanitria do governo dos EUA). Os portadores de marca-passos devem:

Manter SEMPRE o rdio a mais de 15 cm do marca-passo quando o rdio estiver ligado. No levar o rdio no bolso da camisa. Usar o aparelho no ouvido do lado oposto ao do marca-passo para reduzir a possibilidade de interferncia. DESLIGAR o rdio imediatamente se houver qualquer motivo para se suspeitar de interferncia. Portugus do Brasil 20 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 21 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Aparelhos Auditivos Alguns rdios digitais sem fio podem interferir em aparelhos auditivos. Caso haja esse tipo de interferncia, consulte o fabricante do aparelho auditivo para obter alternativas. Outros Equipamentos Mdicos Caso use outros equipamentos mdicos, consulte o fabricante para verificar se ele est adequadamente protegido contra energia de RF. Seu mdico pode ajud-lo a obter essas informaes. Uso de Equipamentos de Comunicao Durante a Operao de Veculos Informe-se sempre sobre as leis e normas a respeito do uso de rdios nas reas onde voc dirige. Preste ateno no trnsito e na rodovia. Use a opo viva-voz, se disponvel. Saia da rodovia e estacione o carro antes de fazer ou receber uma ligao, se as condies de trnsito ou as regulamentaes assim exigirem. 21 Portugus do Brasil 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 22 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Segurana Acstica A exposio a rudos muito altos de qualquer origem por longos perodos pode prejudicar sua audio temporria ou permanentemente. Quanto mais alto for o volume do rdio, menos tempo ser necessrio para prejudicar sua audio. s vezes, os danos auditivos causados por rudos fortes no so detectados em sua fase inicial e podem ter efeito cumulativo. Para proteger sua audio:

Use o volume mais baixo necessrio para a execuo sua tarefa. S aumente o volume se estiver em ambientes com excesso de rudos. Reduza o volume antes de conectar o headset ou o fone de ouvido. Limite o tempo de uso dos headsets ou fones de ouvido com volume alto. Ao usar o rdio sem monofones ou fones de ouvido, no coloque o alto-falante do rdio diretamente em contato com seus ouvidos. Avisos Operacionais ATENO Para Veculos Equipados com Air Bag:

Consulte o manual do fabricante do veculo antes de instalar equipamentos eletrnicos para evitar interferncia com o funcionamento do air bag. NO coloque um rdio porttil na rea sobre um air bag ou na rea de liberao do air bag, pois eles inflam com muita fora. Se um rdio porttil estiver colocado na rea de liberao do air bag e o air bag inflar, o rdio poder ser impelido com grande fora e causar srios ferimentos aos ocupantes do veculo. Portugus do Brasil 22 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 23 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Avisos Operacionais (continuao) ATENO Ambientes potencialmente explosivos

(Ambientes potencialmente explosivos referem-se a locais classificados como de risco que podem conter gases, vapores ou ps nocivos.) Desligue o rdio antes de entrar em uma rea com ambiente potencialmente explosivo, a menos que ele seja um tipo de rdio porttil especialmente qualificado para o uso em tais reas como Intrinsecamente Seguro (por exemplo, Factory Mutual, CSA, UL ou CENELEC). NO remova, instale ou carregue baterias nessas reas. Fascas em um ambiente potencialmente explosivo podem causar uma exploso ou incndio que pode resultar em ferimentos e at mesmo em morte. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos referidas acima incluem reas de abastecimento, como reas abaixo do convs principal em barcos, instalaes de armazenamento ou transferncia de produtos qumicos ou combustveis e reas onde o ar contm partculas ou elementos qumicos, como fibras, poeira ou ps metlicos. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos so frequentes, mas nem sempre h avisos sobre isso. reas e Equipamentos para Detonao Para evitar possveis interferncias em operaes de detonao, desligue o rdio quando estiver prximo a detonadores eltricos, reas de detonao ou reas onde haja avisos tais como: "Desligue o rdio bidirecional." Obedea a todas as sinalizaes e instrues. 23 Portugus do Brasil 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 24 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Cuidados Operacionais Precauo Antenas NO utilize um rdio porttil com antena danificada. Se a antena danificada entrar em contato com sua pele, poder causar uma queimadura leve. Baterias Todas as baterias podem causar danos materiais e ferimentos, tais como queimaduras, se um material condutor como uma joia, chave ou corrente tocar os terminais expostos. O material condutor pode fechar um circuito eltrico (curto-circuito) e esquentar muito. Tenha cuidado ao manipular uma bateria carregada, principalmente ao coloc-la dentro do bolso, de uma bolsa ou em outro local em que haja objetos de metal. Informaes sobre Rdio Intrinsecamente Seguro A unidade de aprovao Intrinsecamente seguro refere-se a um produto que foi aprovado como intrinsecamente seguro por um rgo de aprovao (por exemplo, FM Approvals, CSA, UL ou Cenelec) e certifica que um determinado produto atende aos padres de segurana intrnseca aplicveis do rgo para determinados tipos de locais classificados como de risco. Um rdio porttil que foi aprovado como intrinsecamente seguro ter uma etiqueta de aprovao no rdio para identificar a unidade como aprovada para uso nas atmosferas de risco especificadas. Essa etiqueta especifica a classe, a diviso e o grupo de risco, bem como o nmero de pea da bateria que dever ser utilizada. A Etiqueta de Aprovao de Intrinsecamente Seguro estar localizada na unidade de rdio porttil. Portugus do Brasil 24 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 25 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Cuidados na Operao de Equipamento de Segurana Intrnseca Precauo NO opere o equipamento de comunicaes de rdio em atmosferas de risco a menos que seja um tipo especialmente qualificado (por exemplo, aprovado pela FM, UL, CSA, ou CENELEC). O resultado poder ser uma exploso ou fogo. NO opere uma unidade de rdio aprovada como intrinsecamente segura em atmosferas de risco se ela estiver danificada fisicamente

(por exemplo, parte externa rachada). O resultado poder ser uma exploso ou fogo. NO substitua ou carregue baterias em atmosfera de risco. Podem ocorrer fascas no contato durante a instalao ou remoo das baterias, causando exploso ou fogo. Avisos para Rdios Aprovados como Intrinsecamente Seguros Os rdios devem ser enviados da fbrica da Motorola com a etiqueta de aprovao de recursos para atmosfera de risco e de segurana intrnseca (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). Os rdios no sero atualizados para esse recurso e etiquetados depois de serem enviados. Uma modificao altera o hardware da unidade da sua configurao de projeto original. As modificaes podem ser feitas apenas pelo fabricante original do produto. 25 Portugus do Brasil 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 26 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM ATENO NO substitua nem mude os acessrios em uma atmosfera de risco. Podem ocorrer fascas no contato durante a instalao ou remoo dos acessrios e causar exploso ou fogo. Desligue o rdio antes de remover ou instalar a bateria ou acessrio. NO desmonte um produto intrinsecamente seguro de forma a expor os circuitos internos da unidade. Se uma bateria intrinsecamente segura ou acessrios aprovados especificamente para o rdio no forem usados, poder resultar em uma condio insegura perigosa de uma combinao no aprovada sendo usada em um local de risco. A modificao incorreta ou no autorizada do Produto aprovado intrinsecamente seguro negar a aprovao da classificao do produto. Os reparos ou etiquetagem incorretos de um rdio aprovado como intrinsecamente seguro podero afetar a aprovao da classificao da unidade. O uso de um rdio que no intrinsecamente seguro em uma atmosfera de risco poder resultar em danos graves e at em morte. Reparos ATENO OS REPAROS DE PRODUTOS DA MOTOROLA COM APROVAO INTRINSECAMENTE SEGURA SO DE RESPONSABILIDADE DO USURIO. Os reparos em um rdio aprovado Motorola FM devero ser feitos apenas em um local auditado pela FM sob a norma de reparos e servios FM 3605. Entre em contato com a Motorola para obter assistncia sobre reparos e servios em equipamentos Motorola intrinsecamente seguros. Portugus do Brasil 26 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 27 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Um reparo constitui algo sendo feito internamente na unidade que a retornar as suas condies originais. Os itens que no so considerados como reparos so os em que a ao realizada em uma unidade que no precisa que a parte externa seja aberta para expor os circuitos eltricos internos da unidade. No Substitua Opes ou Acessrios O equipamento de comunicao Motorola certificado como intrinsecamente seguro pelos rgos de aprovao (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC), testado como um sistema completo que consiste do porttil aprovado, bateria aprovada e acessrios e/ou opes aprovados pelo rgo listado. Essa combinao de porttil e bateria aprovada deve ser estritamente observada. No pode haver substituio de itens, mesmo se o substituto tiver sido aprovado previamente com um equipamento de comunicaes Motorola diferente. As configuraes aprovadas so listadas pelo rgo Aprovador (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). A Etiqueta de Aprovao de Intrinsecamente Seguro afixada ao rdio refere-se classificao de intrinsecamente seguro do rdio e da bateria aprovada que pode ser usada com o sistema. O PN manual referenciado na Etiqueta de Aprovao de Intrinsecamente Seguro identifica os acessrios ou opes aprovados que podem ser usados com a unidade de rdio porttil. O uso de uma bateria e/ou acessrio intrinsecamente seguro no Motorola com a unidade de rdio aprovada da Motorola invalidar a aprovao de segurana intrnseca da unidade de rdio. 27 Portugus do Brasil 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 28 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Notas:

Portugus do Brasil 28 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 29 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM RADIOS BIDIRECTIONNELLES PORTATIVES :

EXPOSITION AUX RADIOFRQUENCES ET SCURIT DU PRODUIT ATTENTION!

Avant d'utiliser cette radio, lisez le guide, qui contient d'importantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et des informations sur l'exposition aux frquences radiolectriques, dans le but dassurer votre conformit aux normes et rglements en vigueur. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS et le logotype au M stylis sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de Motorola Trademark Holdings LLC et sont utilises sous licence. Toutes les autres marques de commerce sont la proprit de leurs titulaires respectifs. 2007 2013 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Tous droits rservs. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, U.S.A.

*NNTN7223F*

NNTN7223F 6881095C98-J Franais Canadien 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 30 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Sensibilisation l'exposition l'nergie de RF, moyens de contrle et consignes d'utilisation pour l'usage professionnel de cette radio NOTICE :Cette radio a t conue pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement contrl, o les utilisateurs sont pleinement conscients de l'exposition l'nergie de RF laquelle ils sont soumis et peuvent exercer un contrle sur cette exposition afin de respecter les limites tablies par la FCC et les normes internationales. Ce dispositif radio n'est PAS autoris pour l'utilisation grand public par des consommateurs ordinaires. Cette radio bidirectionnelle utilise de l'nergie lectromagntique dans le spectre de radiofrquence (RF) afin de permettre les communications distance entre deux utilisateurs ou plus. Elle utilise l'nergie de radiofrquence ou les ondes radio pour mettre et recevoir des appels. L'nergie de RF est une forme d'nergie lectromagntique. Ce type d'nergie se prsente sous d'autres formes, notamment la lumire solaire et les rayons X. Il ne faut cependant pas confondre l'nergie de RF avec d'autres formes d'nergie lectromagntique qui, lorsqu'elles sont mal utilises, peuvent occasionner des dommages biologiques. Des niveaux trs levs de rayons X, par exemple, peuvent endommager les tissus et le matriel gntique. Des spcialistes dans les domaines des sciences, de l'ingnierie, de la mdecine, de la sant et de l'industrie travaillent avec diffrentes organisations l'laboration de normes relatives l'exposition scuritaire l'nergie de RF. Ces normes fournissent les niveaux recommands d'exposition aux RF, tant pour les travailleurs que pour le public en gnral. Ces niveaux recommands d'exposition aux RF comprennent des coefficients de scurit apprciables. Toutes les radios bidirectionnelles Motorola sont conues, fabriques et testes de manire garantir leur conformit aux niveaux d'exposition aux radiofrquences tablis par les autorits publiques comptentes. Par ailleurs, les fabricants recommandent aux utilisateurs de radios bidirectionnelles de suivre des directives de fonctionnement spcifiques. Ces directives sont importantes puisqu'elles informent les utilisateurs sur l'exposition l'nergie de RF et proposent des moyens simples pour la contrler. Franais Canadien 30 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 31 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Visitez les sites Web suivants pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur ce qu'est l'nergie de RF et sur les moyens de contrle prendre afin de respecter les limites tablies en matire d'exposition aux radiofrquences. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html www.who.int/fr/

www.motorolasolutions.com/rfhealth Rglements de la Commission fdrale amricaine des communications (FCC) Lorsque les radios bidirectionnelles sont utilises des fins professionnelles, la FCC exige que les utilisateurs soient pleinement conscients des effets de l'exposition et qu'ils soient capables de contrler le niveau d'exposition auquel ils se soumettent afin de rpondre aux exigences de leur profession. Vous pouvez contribuer la sensibilisation des utilisateurs l'exposition aux radiofrquences en apposant des tiquettes de produit leur offrant une rfrence vers la source d'information approprie. Votre radio bidirectionnelle Motorola comporte une tiquette de produit sur l'exposition aux radiofrquences. D'autre part, vous trouverez dans le manuel de l'utilisateur du produit Motorola ou dans la brochure de scurit fournie sparment les informations requises et le mode d'emploi permettant de contrler l'exposition l'nergie de RF et de garantir le respect des normes. Conformit aux normes sur l'exposition aux radiofrquences Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola a t conue et teste afin de garantir sa conformit aux normes et recommandations nationales et internationales ci-dessous lies l'exposition des tres humains l'nergie lectromagntique de radiofrquence. Cette radio respecte les limites d'exposition tablies par l'IEEE (FCC) et l'ICNIRP pour les environnements professionnels ou avec contrle d'exposition aux radiofrquences, des cycles d'utilisation allant jusqu' 50 % mission 50 % rception et est approuve pour un usage professionnel seulement. En ce qui concerne la mesure de l'nergie de RF afin d'valuer la conformit ces normes d'exposition, la radio met de l'nergie de RF mesurable seulement lorsqu'elle est en mode mission (lorsque l'utilisateur parle), et non pas lorsqu'elle est en mode rception (lorsque l'utilisateur coute) ni en mode Attente. 31 Franais Canadien 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 32 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM REMARQUE : Les batteries approuves, fournies avec cette radio, sont cotes en fonction d'un cycle d'utilisation de 5-5-90 (5% mission5 % rception 90 % attente), mme si la radio respecte les limites d'exposition tablies par la FCC pour l'usage professionnel et peut fonctionner selon des cycles d'utilisation allant jusqu' 50 % mission. Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola est conforme aux normes et aux lignes directrices suivantes relatives l'exposition l'nergie de RF :

Commission fdrale amricaine des communications (FCC), Code of Federal Regulations (code de la rglementation fdrale); FCC 47 partie CFR et suiv. FCC, OET Bulletin 65 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1 Commission internationale de protection contre les rayonnements non ionisants

(ICNIRP) Code de scurit 6 du Ministre de la Sant (Canada) et norme CNR-102 d'Industrie Canada Norme de l'Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications et suiv. ANATEL ANNEXE la Rsolution N 303 et suiv. Directives de conformit et de contrle de l'exposition aux RF et directives de fonctionnement pour la communication bidirectionnelle Pour contrler votre exposition et garantir le respect des limites d'exposition en milieu professionnel ou contrl, observez toujours les consignes suivantes. NE dcollez PAS l'tiquette sur l'exposition l'nergie de RF du dispositif. Lorsque l'appareil est cd d'autres utilisateurs, il doit tre accompagn des informations de sensibilisation des utilisateurs. Franais Canadien 32 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 33 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Communication bidirectionnelle Transmission ne dpassant pas le facteur nominal de 50 % du temps. Pour transmettre (parler), appuyez sur le bouton de transmission (PTT). Pour recevoir les appels, relchez le bouton de transmission. Le bouton PTT peut se trouver sur la radio elle-mme ou sur un accessoire avec ou sans fil approuv (par exemple, un bouton de transmission Bluetooth distant). Il est important de ne pas mettre plus de 50 % du temps tant donn que cette radio gnre une nergie de RF dont l'exposition n'est mesurable que lors de l'mission (en termes de conformit aux normes de mesure). Devant le visage. Tenez la radio la verticale, en maintenant une distance d'au moins 2,5 centimtres (1 pouce) entre le micro (et les autres parties de la radio, y compris l'antenne) et le nez ou les lvres. Garder la radio une distance approprie est important afin de garantir le respect des limites. REMARQUE : L'exposition aux radiofrquences diminue quand la distance de l'antenne augmente. Utilisation lorsque la radio est porte sur soi. Lorsque la radio est porte sur soi, utilisez toujours une pince ou une attache de ceinture, placez-la dans un tui ou dans un harnais pour le corps approuv par Motorola pour ce produit. Il est important d'utiliser des accessoires ajusts au corps qui sont approuvs, car dans le cas contraire, l'utilisateur risque de s'exposer des niveaux d'nergie de RF suprieurs aux limites tablies pour les environnements professionnels ou exposition contrle. N'utilisez que des antennes, des batteries et des accessoires audio fournis ou de remplacement approuvs par Motorola. L'utilisation d'antennes, batteries et accessoires avec ou sans fil non approuvs par Motorola pourrait excder les directives d'exposition aux RF applicables (IEEE, ICNIRP ou FCC). Pour une liste des accessoires approuvs par Motorola pour votre modle de radio, visitez le site Web suivant :

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/governmentandenterprise 33 Franais Canadien 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 34 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Interfrence/compatibilit lectromagntique REMARQUE : La grande majorit des dispositifs lectroniques sont sensibles l'effet lectromagntique perturbateur (EMI) s'ils ne sont pas convenablement protgs ou s'ils ne sont pas conus ou configurs de telle sorte qu'ils soient compatibles avec ce type de signaux lectromagntiques. Btiments Afin d'viter des problmes d'interfrence et/ou de compatibilit lectromagntique, teignez la radio lorsque cette consigne est affiche sur un panneau. Il se peut, par exemple, que les hpitaux ou les tablissements de sant utilisent des appareils sensibles l'nergie de RF externe. Aronefs bord d'un avion, teignez la radio lorsque l'quipage vous le demande. Toute utilisation de la radio doit se faire conformment aux rglements en vigueur de la compagnie arienne et sur instructions de l'quipage. Appareils mdicaux Stimulateurs cardiaques L'Association de technologie mdicale avance (AdvaMed, Advanced Medical Technology Association) recommande de conserver une distance minimale de 15 centimtres (6 pouces) entre une radio portative sans fil et un stimulateur cardiaque. Ces recommandations concordent avec les dispositions de l'office amricain de contrle des produits pharmaceutiques et alimentaires (FDA, Food and Drug Administration). Franais Canadien 34 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 35 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Les personnes qui portent un stimulateur cardiaque doivent :

TOUJOURS maintenir la radio plus de 15 centimtres (6 pouces) de leur stimulateur cardiaque lorsque la radio est sous tension. Ne pas porter la radio dans une poche-portefeuille. Placer la radio au niveau de l'oreille oppose au stimulateur cardiaque afin de minimiser la possibilit de brouillage. teindre la radio immdiatement si elles ont des raisons de penser qu'il existe une interfrence quelconque. Prothses auditives Certaines radios numriques sans fil peuvent interfrer avec certains types d'aides auditives. Si tel est le cas, veuillez consulter le fabricant de la prothse auditive pour discuter d'autres solutions possibles. Autres dispositifs mdicaux Si vous utilisez tout autre dispositif mdical personnel, consultez le fabricant du dispositif afin de dterminer s'il est convenablement protg contre l'nergie de RF externe. Votre mdecin peut vous aider obtenir ces renseignements. Utilisation de dispositifs de communication pendant la conduite d'un vhicule Vrifiez toujours les lois et rglements relis l'utilisation des radios dans les rgions o vous conduisez. Concentrez-vous entirement sur votre conduite et sur la route. Utilisez le mode mains libres, s'il est disponible. Rangez-vous sur l'accotement avant de faire un appel ou d'y rpondre si les conditions de conduite sont particulirement mauvaises ou si les lois et rglements l'exigent. 35 Franais Canadien 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 36 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Protection de l'oue Une exposition des bruits forts en provenance de n'importe quelle source pendant de longues priodes de temps pourrait affecter votre audition de manire temporaire ou permanente. Plus le volume sonore de la radio est lev, plus votre audition peut se dtriorer rapidement. Des dommages auditifs dus l'exposition des bruits forts peuvent d'abord tre indtectables, mais ceux-ci ont parfois des effets cumulatifs. Pour protger votre audition :

Rglez le volume le plus bas possible pour effectuer votre travail. Montez le volume seulement si vous vous trouvez dans un environnement bruyant. Baissez le volume avant d'ajouter un casque ou une oreillette. Limitez la priode de temps d'utilisation de casques ou d'couteurs volume lev. Lorsque vous utilisez la radio sans casque ni couteur, ne placez pas le haut-parleur directement sur votre oreille. Avertissements de fonctionnement AVERTISSEMENT Pour les vhicules quips de coussins gonflables :

Consultez le manuel du fabricant du vhicule avant d'installer un appareil lectronique, afin d'viter toute interfrence avec le cblage des coussins gonflables. NE placez PAS de radio portative dans la zone situe au-dessus d'un coussin gonflable ou dans la zone de dploiement de ce dernier. Un coussin gonflable de scurit se dploie avec beaucoup de force. Si une radio portative se trouve dans la zone de dploiement du coussin lorsque celui-ci se gonfle, la radio peut tre propulse avec une force considrable et risque alors d'occasionner de graves lsions corporelles aux passagers du vhicule. Franais Canadien 36 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 37 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Avertissements de fonctionnement (suite) AVERTISSEMENT Atmosphres potentiellement explosives

(Les atmosphres explosives sont des endroits classifis comme dangereux, pouvant contenir des vapeurs, des poudres ou des gaz dangereux.) teignez la radio avant d'entrer dans un milieu avec une atmosphre potentiellement explosive, sauf s'il s'agit d'une radio portative de type scurit intrinsque spcialement conue pour l'utilisation dans un tel milieu (par exemple, s'il s'agit d'une radio homologue par Factory Mutual, CSA, UL ou CENELEC). VITEZ d'enlever, de remplacer ou de recharger les batteries dans un tel milieu. Les tincelles dans des atmosphres potentiellement explosives peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie et entraner des lsions corporelles, voire la mort. Parmi les zones potentiellement explosives mentionnes plus haut, citons les zones de ravitaillement en carburant, par exemple la cale des bateaux, les installations de transfert et de stockage de carburant ou de produits chimiques et les zones dans lesquelles l'air est charg en produits chimiques ou en particules telles que de la poudre de crales, de la poussire ou des poudres mtalliques. Les zones atmosphres potentiellement explosives affichent gnralement des panneaux de mise en garde, mais ce n'est pas toujours le cas. Zone de dynamitage et de dtonateurs teignez la radio lorsque vous vous trouvez proximit de dtonateurs lectriques ou dans une zone de dynamitage afin d'viter de dclencher une explosion, ou lorsque vous vous trouvez dans un endroit o il est indiqu : teindre les radios bidirectionnelles . Respectez tous les panneaux et toutes les consignes. 37 Franais Canadien 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 38 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Prcautions relatives au fonctionnement Prcaution Antennes N'utilisez PAS une radio portative, quelle qu'elle soit, dont l'antenne est endommage. Si une antenne endommage entre en contact avec votre peau, il peut en rsulter une brlure lgre. Batteries Toutes les batteries peuvent provoquer des dommages, des blessures ou des brlures si un objet conducteur, par exemple un bijou, une cl ou les mailles d'une chane, entre en contact avec les bornes de la batterie. Le matriel conducteur risque de fermer un circuit lectrique (court-circuit) et de devenir trs chaud. Manipulez avec prcaution les batteries charges, en particulier lorsqu'elles sont places dans une poche, un sac main ou tout autre endroit contenant des objets mtalliques. Informations sur les radios scurit intrinsque L'homologation titre de produit scurit intrinsque indique qu'un produit a t reconnu intrinsquement scuritaire par un service d'homologation (par exemple, FM Approvals, CSA, UL ou Cenelec) et certifie qu'un produit particulier rpond aux normes applicables du service d'homologation en matire de scurit pour certains types particuliers de milieux dangereux classifis. Toute radio portative ayant t agre de scurit intrinsque doit porter l'tiquette d'homologation correspondante qui l'identifie comme tant agre pour un usage dans des atmosphres dangereuses spcifies. L'tiquette spcifie la catgorie de risque laquelle correspond la batterie (Classe/Division/Groupe), ainsi que le numro de rfrence de la batterie qui doit tre utilis. L'tiquette d'homologation d'un dispositif de scurit intrinsque doit tre appose sur l'unit de radio portative. Franais Canadien 38 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 39 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Prcautions relatives au fonctionnement de l'quipement de scurit intrinsque Prcaution NE PAS faire fonctionner d'appareil de communication radio dans une atmosphre dangereuse moins qu'il ne soit d'un type appropri

(par exemple, homologu par FM, UL, CSA ou CENELEC). Vous risquez de provoquer une explosion ou un incendie. NE PAS faire fonctionner une radio scurit intrinsque homologue dans une atmosphre dangereuse si la radio est endommage (par exemple, si son botier est fendu). Vous risquez de provoquer une explosion ou un incendie. NE PAS remplacer NI charger des batteries dans une atmosphre dangereuse. La production d'tincelles lors de l'installation ou du retrait des batteries prsente un risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. Avertissements concernant les radios agres de scurit intrinsque Les radios doivent offrir la possibilit d'utilisation dans une atmosphre dangereuse et porter l'tiquette d'homologation titre d'appareil scurit intrinsque avant d'tre expdies de l'usine de fabrication de Motorola. Les radios ne pourront tre mises niveau afin d'offrir cette caractristique ni tre tiquetes comme telles une fois expdies et achemines sur le terrain. Toute modification change la configuration du modle d'origine des composants de l'unit. Les modifications ne peuvent tre effectues que par le fabricant du produit d'origine. 39 Franais Canadien 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 40 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM VITEZ de remplacer ou de changer des accessoires dans une atmosphre dangereuse. Des tincelles peuvent se produire lors de l'installation ou du retrait des accessoires et provoquer un incendie ou une explosion. teignez la radio avant d'enlever ou d'installer une batterie ou un AVERTISSEMENT accessoire. NE PAS dsassembler un produit scurit intrinsque de manire exposer les circuits internes de l'unit. Le fait de ne pas utiliser une batterie scurit intrinsque homologue ou des accessoires approuvs spcialement conus pour le modle de radio utilis peut crer une dangereuse situation de risque cause par l'utilisation d'un ensemble radio non approuv dans un endroit dangereux. Toute modification incorrecte ou non agre du produit agr de scurit intrinsque annulera la classification de ce dernier. La rparation incorrecte ou le nouvel tiquetage de toute radio scurit intrinsque homologue par un service d'homologation risque d'annuler la classe d'homologation de l'unit. L'utilisation d'une radio autre qu'une radio scurit intrinsque dans une atmosphre dangereuse est susceptible d'entraner des blessures graves ou la mort. Rparation AVERTISSEMENT IL INCOMBE L'UTILISATEUR DE FAIRE FAIRE LES RPARATIONS NCESSAIRES AUX PRODUITS MOTOROLA SCURIT INTRINSQUE HOMOLOGUS. La rparation d'une radio Motorola agre par la FMRC doit tre exclusivement effectue dans des locaux superviss par la FMRC rpondant aux normes d'homologation FMRC numro de classe 3605 relatives au service et la rparation. Contactez Motorola afin d'obtenir une assistance pour le service et la rparation d'units Motorola scurit intrinsque. Franais Canadien 40 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 41 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Le terme rparation dsigne tout travail effectu sur les composants internes de l'unit afin de ramener celle-ci son tat d'origine. Un travail qui ne ncessite pas l'ouverture du botier de l'unit afin d'en exposer les circuits lectriques internes ne constitue pas une rparation. vitez d'interchanger des options ou des accessoires. L'quipement de communications Motorola certifi de scurit intrinsque par l'entit d'homologation (FMRC, UL, CSA, CENELEC) est test en tant que systme complet, savoir : la radio portative, la batterie, les accessoires et les options, tous agrs par l'entit correspondante. L'intgrit de cette configuration forme d'une radio portative et d'une batterie agres doit tre strictement respecte. Aucune substitution d'lment n'est permise, mme si l'lment de remplacement a pralablement t agr pour une autre unit de communication Motorola. Les configurations agres peuvent tre consultes dans la liste mise disposition par l'entit d'homologation (FMRC, UL, CSA, CENELEC). L'tiquette d'homologation de scurit intrinsque appose sur la radio identifie la classification de scurit intrinsque de cette radio ainsi que les batteries agres qui peuvent tre utilises avec ce systme. Le numro de rfrence du manuel mentionn sur l'tiquette d'homologation de scurit intrinsque identifie les accessoires et/ou les options agrs qui peuvent tre utiliss avec cette unit de radio portative. Le fait de ne pas utiliser une batterie ou un accessoire Motorola de scurit intrinsque avec l'unit de radio Motorola agre annule l'homologation de scurit intrinsque de cette unit de radio. 41 Franais Canadien 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 42 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Remarques :

Franais Canadien 42 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 43 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM GUA DE EXPOSICIN DE ENERGA DE RADIOFRECUENCIA Y SEGURIDAD DEL PRODUCTO PARA RADIOS BIDIRECCIONALES PORTTILES ATENCIN!

Antes de usar este radio, lea esta gua que contiene instrucciones de funcionamiento importantes para un uso seguro del dispositivo e instrucciones para tomar conciencia y controlar la energa de RADIOFRECUENCIA para cumplir con las normas y regulaciones correspondientes. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS y el logotipo de la M estilizada son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC y se utilizan bajo licencia. Todas las dems marcas comerciales pertenecen a sus respectivos dueos. 2007 2013 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, EE.UU.

*NNTN7223F*

NNTN7223F 6881095C98-J Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 44 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Informacin para tomar conciencia y controlar la exposicin a la energa de RF e instrucciones de funcionamiento para uso profesional AVISO: Este radio est diseado para usarse en condiciones controladas o profesionales, donde los usuarios tengan pleno conocimiento de su exposicin y puedan controlar su exposicin para cumplir con los lmites profesionales de la FCC y de los estndares internacionales. Este dispositivo de radio NO est autorizado para el uso particular de la poblacin en general. El radio bidireccional utiliza energa electromagntica en el espectro de la frecuencia de radio (RF) para lograr la comunicacin a distancia entre dos o ms usuarios. Emplea energa de radiofrecuencia (RF) u ondas de radio para enviar y recibir llamadas. La energa de RF es una forma de energa electromagntica. Otras formas incluyen, por ejemplo, la luz solar y los rayos X. Sin embargo, no debe confundirse la energa de RF con otras formas de energa electromagntica que, al usarse de manera incorrecta, pueden producir daos biolgicos. Los niveles muy elevados de rayos X, por ejemplo, pueden daar los tejidos y el material gentico. Expertos en ciencias, ingeniera, medicina, salud e industria trabajan con ciertas organizaciones para desarrollar estndares para una exposicin segura a la energa de RF. Estos estndares indican los niveles recomendados de exposicin a radiofrecuencia, tanto para los trabajadores como para el pblico en general. Estos niveles de exposicin a radiofrecuencia incluyen mrgenes de proteccin bastante amplios. Todos los radios bidireccionales de Motorola han sido diseados, fabricados y probados para garantizar que cumplan con los niveles de exposicin a radiofrecuencia establecidos por el gobierno. Adems, los fabricantes recomiendan instrucciones de funcionamiento especficas para los usuarios de radios bidireccionales. Estas instrucciones son relevantes, ya que informan al usuario acerca de la exposicin a la energa de RF y ofrecen procedimientos sencillos para controlar dicha energa. Espaol Latinoamericano 44 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 45 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Consulte los siguientes sitios web para obtener informacin adicional acerca de la exposicin a la energa de RF y de cmo controlarla para garantizar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin establecidos:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html www.who.int/en/

www.motorolasolutions.com/rfhealth Regulaciones de la Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones (FCC) Cuando los radios bidireccionales se usan para trabajar, la FCC indica que los usuarios deben conocer su nivel de exposicin y tener la capacidad de controlarla, a fin de cumplir los requisitos de uso profesional. El conocimiento del nivel de exposicin puede proporcionarse mediante el uso de una etiqueta de producto que muestre al usuario informacin de conocimiento especfica para los usuarios. El radio bidireccional de Motorola tiene una etiqueta de producto de exposicin a RF. Asimismo, el manual de usuario de Motorola y el folleto de seguridad que viene aparte incluyen la informacin y las directrices de funcionamiento necesarias para controlar la exposicin de RF y cumplir con los requisitos. Cumplimiento de los estndares de exposicin a RF El radio bidireccional de Motorola est diseado y probado de manera tal que cumple con varios estndares y lineamientos nacionales e internacionales

(enumerados ms adelante) en materia de exposicin humana a la energa electromagntica de radiofrecuencia. Este radio cumple con los lmites de exposicin del IEEE (FCC) y de la ICNIRP para ambientes controlados o de uso profesional con exposicin a radiofrecuencia con factores de funcionamiento de hasta un 50 % de habla y 50 % de escucha, y ha sido aprobado para uso profesional. En cuanto a la medicin de la energa de RF para el cumplimiento de estos lineamientos de exposicin, el radio genera energa de RF que puede medirse, solamente mientras realiza una transmisin (cuando el usuario habla), no al efectuar la recepcin (escucha) ni en modo de espera. 45 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 46 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM NOTA: Las bateras aprobadas que se entregan con el radio estn clasificadas para un factor de funcionamiento de 5-5-90 (5 % de habla, 5 % de escucha y 90 % en espera) a pesar de que el radio cumpla con los lmites de exposicin en uso profesional de la FCC y pueden funcionar con factores de funcionamiento de hasta un 50 % de habla. El radio bidireccional de Motorola cumple con los siguientes lineamientos y estndares de exposicin a energa de RF:

Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones (FCC, Federal Communications Commission) de los Estados Unidos, Cdigo de Regulaciones Federales;

CFR 47 y ss. FCC, Boletn de OET 65 Instituto de Ingenieros Elctricos y Electrnicos (IEEE, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) C95.1 Comisin Internacional contra las Radiaciones No Ionizantes (ICNIRP, International Commission of Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) Cdigo de seguridad 6 del Ministerio de Salud (Canad) y RSS-102 del Ministerio de Industria de Canad Estndar de radiocomunicaciones de la entidad de comunicaciones australiana y ss. ANATEL, Anexo a Resolucin No. 303 y ss. Cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia (RF) y lineamientos de control e instrucciones de funcionamiento para radios bidireccionales Para controlar su nivel de exposicin y garantizar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a ambientes controlados o de uso profesional, siga siempre los procedimientos siguientes. NO retire la etiqueta de exposicin a radiofrecuencia del dispositivo. Los lineamientos referentes al uso seguro por parte del usuario deberan entregarse junto con el dispositivo cuando se transfiera a otros usuarios. Espaol Latinoamericano 46 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 47 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Funcionamiento del radio bidireccional. No transmita ms all del factor de funcionamiento normal del 50 % del tiempo. Para transmitir (hablar), presione el botn PTT (pulsar para hablar). Para recibir llamadas, suelte el botn PTT. El botn PTT puede estar en el radio o puede encontrarse en los accesorios con cable o inalmbricos aprobados (por ejemplo, un botn PTT remoto con Bluetooth). La transmisin del 50 % del tiempo, o menos, es importante, porque este radio genera una exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia que solamente se puede medir durante la transmisin (en trminos de medicin para el cumplimiento de los estndares). Al frente de la cara. Sostenga el radio en posicin vertical frente a la cara con el micrfono (y las dems partes del radio, incluida la antena) al menos a 2,5 cm (1 pulg.) de distancia de la nariz o los labios. Mantener el radio a una distancia adecuada es importante para garantizar el cumplimiento. NOTA: La exposicin a las radiofrecuencias disminuye al aumentar la distancia con la antena. Funcionamiento del equipo ajustado al cuerpo. Siempre que use el radio ajustado al cuerpo, pngalo en un clip, un soporte, un estuche, una funda o un arns para el cuerpo aprobado por Motorola para el producto. El uso de accesorios para llevar el equipo en el cuerpo es importante, porque el uso de accesorios que no estn aprobados por Motorola puede causar que nivel de exposicin supere los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia en ambientes profesionales/controlados. Use nicamente las antenas de repuesto suministradas o aprobadas por Motorola. El uso de antenas, bateras y accesorios con cable o inalmbricos no autorizados por Motorola puede exceder los lineamientos sobre la exposicin a radiofrecuencia aplicables (IEEE, ICNIRP o FCC). Para obtener una lista de las antenas, bateras y otros accesorios aprobados por Motorola para el modelo de radio, visite el siguiente sitio web:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/governmentandenterprise 47 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 48 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Interferencia/compatibilidad electromagnticas NOTA: Casi todos los dispositivos electrnicos son susceptibles a las interferencias electromagnticas (EMI) si no cuentan con la debida proteccin o si no estn diseados o configurados de manera que sean compatibles con este tipo de seales electromagnticas. Instalaciones Para evitar conflictos de interferencias o de compatibilidad electromagntica, apague el radio en todo sitio donde haya letreros que as lo indiquen. Los hospitales y establecimientos de atencin mdica podran estar usando equipos sensibles a la energa de RF externa. Aviones Cuando est a bordo de un avin, apague el radio cuando se le indique. Si usa el radio, deber hacerlo de conformidad con las regulaciones de la lnea area y las instrucciones de la tripulacin. Dispositivos mdicos Marcapasos La asociacin de tecnologa mdica avanzada (AdvaMed) recomienda mantener una distancia mnima de 15 cm (6 pulg.) entre un radio inalmbrico porttil y un marcapasos. Estas recomendaciones estn en conformidad con las de la Administracin de Drogas y Alimentos de Estados Unidos. Las personas que usen marcapasos deben:

Mantener SIEMPRE el radio a una distancia aproximada de 15 cm (6 pulg.) o ms del marcapasos cuando est ENCENDIDO. No colocar el radio en el bolsillo de una camisa. Utilizar el odo opuesto al marcapasos para minimizar posibles interferencias. APAGAR el radio inmediatamente si cree que se est generando interferencia. Espaol Latinoamericano 48 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 49 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Aparatos auditivos Algunos radios inalmbricos digitales pueden interferir con ciertos aparatos auditivos. En caso de que existan interferencias, puede consultar con el fabricante del aparato auditivo para buscar posibles alternativas. Otros dispositivos mdicos Si utiliza cualquier otro dispositivo mdico, consulte con el fabricante del dispositivo para determinar si est protegido adecuadamente contra la energa de RF externa. Su mdico podra ayudarlo a obtener esta informacin. Uso de dispositivos de comunicacin mientras se conduce Consulte siempre las leyes y los reglamentos para el uso de radios en las zonas donde conduce. Preste toda su atencin a la conduccin y al camino. Use la funcin de manos libres, si est disponible. Salga del camino y estacinese antes de realizar o contestar una llamada, si las condiciones de manejo o los reglamentos relacionados as lo exigen. 49 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 50 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Seguridad acstica La exposicin a ruidos fuertes de cualquier fuente durante perodos prolongados podra afectar la audicin de manera temporal o permanente. Cuanto ms alto sea el volumen del radio, menos tardar la audicin en verse afectada. En ocasiones, el dao a la audicin provocado por ruidos fuertes es indetectable en un principio y puede tener efecto acumulativo. Para proteger la audicin:

Use el volumen ms bajo necesario para hacer su trabajo. Aumente el volumen solo si se encuentra en un ambiente ruidoso. Reduzca el volumen antes de conectar el audfono o auricular. Limite el tiempo durante el cual usa los auriculares o los audfonos a volumen alto. Al usar el radio sin audfono o auricular, no ponga el altavoz del radio directamente en la oreja. Advertencias sobre el funcionamiento ADVERTENCIA Para vehculos provistos de bolsa de aire (air bag):

Consulte el manual del fabricante del vehculo antes de instalar equipos electrnicos, a fin de evitar la interferencia con el cableado de las bolsas de aire. NO ponga el radio porttil sobre el rea de la bolsa de aire ni sobre la zona de despliegue de esta. Las bolsas de aire se inflan con gran fuerza. Si se pone un radio en la zona de despliegue de la bolsa de aire y esta se infla, es posible que el radio salga disparado con gran fuerza y cause lesiones graves a los ocupantes del vehculo. Espaol Latinoamericano 50 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 51 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Advertencias sobre el funcionamiento (continuacin) ADVERTENCIA Atmsferas potencialmente explosivas

(El trmino atmsferas explosivas se refiere a lugares clasificados como peligrosos que pueden contener gases, vapores o polvos peligrosos). Apague el radio antes de ingresar a un rea con una atmsfera potencialmente explosiva, a menos que el tipo de radio haya sido clasificado especficamente para el uso en tales reas como Intrnsecamente seguro (por ejemplo, aprobado por Factory Mutual, CSA, UL o CENELEC). NO retire, instale ni cargue bateras en estas reas. Las chispas en ambientes potencialmente explosivos pueden desencadenar una explosin o un incendio, y ocasionar lesiones o incluso la muerte. Entre los ambientes potencialmente explosivos mencionados anteriormente, se encuentran las reas con combustible, por ejemplo, debajo de la cubierta de barcos; instalaciones de transferencia y almacenamiento de combustible y productos qumicos; reas donde el aire contiene productos qumicos o partculas tales como granos, polvos o polvos metlicos. En las reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas hay generalmente seales de precaucin, aunque no siempre es as. Detonadores y reas de explosivos Para evitar posibles interferencias con operaciones de voladuras, apague el radio cuando se encuentre cerca de los detonadores, en un rea de explosivos o en reas donde se encuentre el siguiente aviso: Apague la radio bidireccional. Respete todos los carteles e instrucciones. 51 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 52 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Precauciones sobre el funcionamiento Precaucin Antenas NO use ningn radio porttil que tenga la antena daada. Si una antena daada toca la piel, puede causar una pequea quemadura. Bateras Todas las bateras pueden causar daos materiales, lesiones o quemaduras si un material conductor, por ejemplo, joyas, llaves o cadenas, hace contacto con los terminales expuestos. El material conductor podra cerrar un circuito elctrico (cortocircuito) y tornarse muy caliente. Manipule con cuidado las bateras cargadas, especialmente cuando las lleve dentro de un bolsillo, bolso o en algn otro contenedor con objetos metlicos. Informacin del radio intrnsecamente seguro La unidad con aprobacin de intrnsecamente seguro hace referencia a un producto que ha sido aprobado como intrnsecamente seguro por parte de un organismo de aprobacin (por ejemplo, FM Approvals, CSA, UL o Cenelec) y certifica que un producto determinado cumple con los estndares de intrnsecamente seguro correspondientes de dicho organismo para tipos especficos de lugares clasificados como peligrosos. Los radios porttiles que han recibido aprobacin de intrnsecamente seguros tendrn una etiqueta de aprobacin adherida para identificar la unidad como aprobada para determinadas atmsferas peligrosas. Esta etiqueta especifica la clase, la divisin o el grupo de peligro junto con el nmero de pieza de la batera que se debe usar. La etiqueta de aprobacin de intrnsecamente seguro se encontrar sobre la unidad de radio porttil. Espaol Latinoamericano 52 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 53 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Precauciones de funcionamiento para equipos intrnsecamente seguros Precaucin NO haga funcionar el equipo para comunicaciones de radio en atmsferas peligrosas, a menos que se trate de un tipo especialmente calificado (por ejemplo, aprobado por FM, UL, CSA o CENELEC). Podra producirse un incendio o una explosin. NO haga funcionar una unidad de radio que haya sido aprobada como producto intrnsecamente seguro en atmsferas peligrosas si presenta daos fsicos (por ejemplo, si la cubierta est quebrada). Podra producirse un incendio o una explosin. NO reemplace ni cargue las bateras en una atmsfera peligrosa. Mientras se instalan o se quitan las bateras, pueden producirse chispas en el contacto que provoquen una explosin o un incendio. Advertencias para los radios aprobados como intrnsecamente seguros Los radios deben enviarse desde las instalaciones de fabricacin de Motorola con la capacidad para atmsferas peligrosas y con la etiqueta que indica que est aprobado como intrnsecamente seguro (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). Una vez que se hayan enviado los radios a terreno, no se actualizarn para alcanzar la capacidad ni se los etiquetar. Las modificaciones cambian la configuracin del diseo original del hardware de la unidad. Solo el fabricante del producto original puede realizar modificaciones. 53 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 54 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM ADVERTENCIA NO reemplace ni cambie los accesorios en una atmsfera peligrosa. Mientras se instalan o se quitan los accesorios, pueden producirse chispas en el contacto que provoquen una explosin o un incendio. Apague el radio antes de quitar o instalar una batera o un accesorio. NO desarme un producto intrnsecamente seguro de ninguna manera que exponga los circuitos internos de la unidad. Si no se usan bateras aprobadas como intrnsecamente seguras o accesorios aprobados especficamente para la unidad de radio, puede provocar una condicin de inseguridad peligrosa en la que se usa una combinacin de radio no aprobada para lugares peligrosos. La modificacin no autorizada o incorrecta de un producto aprobado como intrnsecamente seguro anular la calificacin de aprobacin del producto. La reparacin incorrecta o el cambio de etiqueta de cualquier radio aprobado por un organismo como dispositivo intrnsecamente seguro pueden afectar de manera negativa la calificacin de aprobacin de la unidad. El uso de un radio que no sea intrnsecamente seguro en una atmsfera peligrosa puede provocar lesiones graves o la muerte. Reparacin ADVERTENCIA LAS REPARACIONES DE LOS PRODUCTOS MOTOROLA INTRNSECAMENTE SEGUROS SON RESPONSABILIDAD DEL USUARIO. Las reparaciones de un producto de radio de Motorola aprobado por FM deben realizarse en instalaciones auditadas por FM de conformidad con el estndar de reparaciones y servicio 3605 de FM. Pngase en contacto con Motorola para solicitar asistencia relacionada con las reparaciones y las tareas de servicio de los equipos Motorola intrnsecamente seguros. Espaol Latinoamericano 54 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 55 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Una reparacin consta de algo hecho en el interior de la unidad que debe devolverla a su estado original. Las instancias que no se consideran reparaciones son las que incluyen una accin realizada en una unidad que no requiere que la cubierta externa se abra de manera tal que queden expuestos los circuitos elctricos de la unidad. No sustituya los elementos opcionales ni accesorios Los equipos para comunicaciones Motorola que cuentan con un certificado de intrnsecamente seguros emitido por un organismo de aprobacin (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC) son probados como sistemas completos que incluyen: el dispositivo porttil aprobado, la batera aprobada y los accesorios u opciones aprobados, o ambos. Debe respetar de manera estricta esta combinacin de dispositivo porttil y batera aprobados. No deben sustituirse los elementos, aun si la pieza de sustitucin ha sido aprobada con anterioridad para otro equipo de comunicaciones Motorola. Las configuraciones aprobadas son detalladas por el organismo de aprobacin (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). La etiqueta de aprobacin como intrnsecamente seguro adherida al radio indica la clasificacin de intrnsecamente seguro de ese radio e indica las bateras aprobadas que pueden usarse con el sistema. La etiqueta de aprobacin de intrnsecamente seguro adherida al radio hace referencia a un nmero de pieza manual que indica los accesorios o las opciones que han sido aprobados para su uso con el radio porttil. El uso de una batera o un accesorio aprobados como intrnsecamente seguros que no sean de Motorola con el radio Motorola aprobado anular la aprobacin de intrnsecamente seguro de esa unidad de radio. 55 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 56 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Notas:

Espaol Latinoamericano 56

 

 

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO SL Series PORTABLES USER GUIDE Contents Declaration of Conformity.......................13 RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guidelines and Instructions......................... 20 C o n t e n t s Notes...............................................15 Notes...............................................21 Important Safety Information........16 Software Version............................17 Computer Software Copyrights....18 Handling Precautions....................19 Getting Started...............................22 How to Use This Guide..................................22 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You.............................................22 Preparing Your Radio for Use.......23 Charging the Battery......................................23 Attaching the Battery..................................... 24 Attaching the Earpiece/Audio Accessory.......24 Powering Up the Radio..................................25 Adjusting the Volume.....................................25 Identifying Radio Controls............26 3 English Radio Controls...............................................26 Using the 4-Way Navigation Disc.................. 27 Using the Keypad.......................................... 28 Capacity Plus.................................................42 Linked Capacity Plus..................................... 42 Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode............30 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button............................30 Programmable Buttons..................................30 Assignable Radio Functions............... 31 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions....................................... 33 Accessing the Programmed Functions..........33 Identifying Status Indicators...........................34 Display Icons.......................................34 Call Icons............................................ 37 Utilities Icons.......................................37 Mini Notice Icons.................................38 Sent Item Icons ..................................38 Job Tickets Icons................................ 39 LED Indicator...................................... 39 Audio Tones........................................40 Indicator Tones................................... 41 Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-Connect Plus Modes.........................41 IP Site Connect..............................................41 s t n e t n o C 4 English Making and Receiving Calls..........44 Selecting a Site..............................................44 Roam Request....................................44 Site Restriction....................................44 Selecting a Zone............................................44 Selecting a Channel.......................................45 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call... 46 Receiving and Responding to a Group Call......................................46 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call.................................... 47 Receiving an All Call...........................48 Receiving and Responding to a Phone Call..................................... 48 Making a Radio Call.......................................49 Making a Group Call........................... 50 Making a Private Call .........................51 Making an All Call............................... 52 Making a Phone Call with the One Touch Access Button.....................52 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button.......................... 54 Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key ................................................55 Making a Phone Call with the Programmable Phone Button........ 56 Stopping a Radio Call....................................57 Talkaround.....................................................58 Monitoring Features.......................................59 Monitoring a Channel..........................59 Permanent Monitor............................. 59 Advanced Features in Non-

Connect Plus Mode....................60 Radio Check.................................................. 60 Sending a Radio Check...................... 60 Remote Monitor............................................. 61 Initiating Remote Monitor....................62 Scan Lists...................................................... 63 Viewing an Entry in the Scan List....... 63 Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search..............................64 Editing the Scan List........................... 64 Scan...............................................................68 Setting an Active Scan List................. 68 Starting and Stopping Scan................ 69 Responding to a Transmission During a Scan................................ 69 Deleting a Nuisance Channel............. 70 Restoring a Nuisance Channel........... 70 Contact Settings............................................ 70 Making a Group Call from Contacts....71 Making a Private Call from Contacts ........................................72 Making a Phone Call from Contacts... 73 Making a Call Alias Search ................75 Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias Search .................77 Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key ......... 78 Removing the Association between Entry and Programmable Number Key ..................................79 Adding a New Contact........................ 80 Sending a Message to a Contact........80 Call Indicator Settings....................................81 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert .....................81 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls ............... 81 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message..............82 C o n t e n t s 5 English Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text........................................ 83 Assigning Ring Styles......................... 83 All Tones.............................................84 Ring Alert Type Selection................... 84 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume...........85 Call Log Features.......................................... 85 Viewing Recent Calls..........................86 Missed Call Screen.............................86 Storing an Alias from a Call List..........86 Deleting a Call from a Call List............86 Viewing Details from a Call List.......... 87 Call Alert Operation....................................... 87 Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert........................................ 88 Making a Call Alert from the Contact List....................................88 Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button.....................89 Emergency Operation....................................89 Receiving an Emergency Alarm..........90 Responding to an Emergency Alarm............................................. 90 Sending an Emergency Alarm............ 91 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call.................................................92 s t n e t n o C 6 English Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow ............................. 93 Reinitiating an Emergency Mode........94 Exiting Emergency Mode....................94 Text Message Features.................................94 Writing and Sending a Text Message........................................ 95 Sending a Quick Text Message..........96 Sending a Quick Text Message..........97 Accessing the Drafts Folder................98 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages.................................... 100 Managing Sent Text Messages........ 102 Receiving a Text Message................105 Managing Received Text Messages.105 Job Tickets...................................................109 Accessing the Job Ticket Folder.......109 Responding to the Job Ticket........... 110 Deleting a Job Ticket........................ 111 Privacy.........................................................111 Covert Mode................................................ 113 Entering Covert Mode.......................113 Exiting Covert Mode..........................113 Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF)............ 113 Multi-Site Controls....................................... 113 Starting an Automatic Site Search....114 Stopping an Automatic Site Search.. 115 Starting a Manual Site Search.......... 115 Security........................................................116 Radio Disable....................................116 Radio Enable.................................... 118 Lone Worker................................................ 119 Password Lock Features............................. 120 Accessing the Radio from Password..................................... 120 Unlocking the Radio from Locked State............................................ 121 Turning the Password Lock On or Off................................................ 121 Changing the Password....................122 Bluetooth Operation.....................................123 Turning Bluetooth On and Off...........123 Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device..........................124 Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device (Discoverable Mode)...........................................125 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device..........................................125 Switching Audio Route......................126 Viewing Device Details..................... 126 Editing Device Name........................ 126 Deleting Device Name...................... 127 Bluetooth Mic Gain............................127 Notification List............................................ 127 Accessing the Notification List.......... 128 Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP)............. 128 Utilities......................................................... 129 Locking and Unlocking the Keypad.. 129 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off......129 Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off.................... 130 Identifying Cable Type...................... 130 Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) Feature On or Off...................................... 130 Controlling the Display Backlight...... 131 Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off............................................132 Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level..................................132 Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off............................................133 Setting the Text Message Alert Tone.............................................134 Changing the Display Mode..............134 Adjusting the Display Brightness...... 135 Wallpaper Mode................................136 Screen Saver Mode.......................... 136 Audio Accessory............................... 137 Auto Keypad Lock.............................137 C o n t e n t s 7 English Language..........................................138 Turning the LED Indicator On or Off. 138 Voice Announcement........................138 Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)...........139 Intelligent Audio................................ 140 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off..... 141 Text Entry Configuration................... 142 Flexible Receive List.........................147 Accessing General Radio Information...................................150 RSSI Values......................................153 Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode..................154 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button..........................154 Programmable Buttons................................154 Assignable Radio Functions............. 155 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions..................................... 155 Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus Mode...............................................156 Display Icons.....................................156 Call Icons.......................................... 158 Sent Item Icons ................................158 s t n e t n o C 8 English LED Indicator.................................... 159 Indicator Tones................................. 160 Audio Tones......................................160 Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode..................161 Selecting a Site............................................161 Roam Request..................................161 Site Lock On/Off................................161 Site Restriction..................................161 Selecting a Zone..........................................162 Using Multiple Networks.............................. 162 Selecting a Call Type...................................163 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call. 163 Receiving and Responding to a Group Call....................................163 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call.................................. 164 Receiving an All Call.........................165 Making a Radio Call.....................................165 Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob.............................. 166 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button........................ 168 Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.......................................... 168 Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode................................. 170 Auto Fallback...............................................170 Indications of Auto Fallback Mode....170 Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode............................................170 Returning to Normal Operation.........171 Radio Check................................................ 171 Sending a Radio Check.................... 171 Remote Monitor........................................... 172 Initiating Remote Monitor..................172 Scan.............................................................173 Starting and Stopping Scan.............. 173 Responding to a Transmission During a Scan.............................. 174 User Configurable Scan...............................174 Turning Scan On or Off.....................175 Editing the Scan List......................... 175 Understanding Scan Operation.........176 Contacts Settings.........................................177 Making a Private Call from Contacts.177 Making a Call Alias Search...............178 Adding a New Contact...................... 179 Call Indicator Settings..................................179 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert ...................179 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls.............. 180 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message............181 Assigning Ring Styles....................... 181 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume.........182 Call Log Features........................................ 182 Viewing Recent Calls........................183 Deleting a Call from a Call List..........183 Viewing Details from a Call List........ 184 Call Alert Operation..................................... 184 Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert...................................... 184 Making a Call Alert from the Contact List..................................184 Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button...................185 Emergency Operation..................................185 Receiving an Incoming Emergency.. 187 Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List...............................188 Deleting the Emergency Details........188 C o n t e n t s 9 English Responding to an Emergency Call... 188 Responding to an Emergency Alert.. 189 Initiating an Emergency Call............. 189 Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow............................ 190 Initiating an Emergency Alert............190 Exiting Emergency Mode..................191 Text Message Features...............................191 Writing and Sending a Text Message...................................... 192 Sending a Quick Text Message........193 Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button.......................................... 194 Accessing the Drafts Folder..............195 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages.................................... 197 Managing Sent Text Messages........ 199 Receiving a Text Message................202 Reading a Text Message..................202 Managing Received Text Messages.202 Privacy.........................................................206 Making a Privacy-Enabled

(Scrambled) Call.......................... 207 Security........................................................207 Radio Disable....................................207 Radio Enable.................................... 209 Password Lock Features............................. 210 Accessing the Radio from Password..................................... 210 Unlocking the Radio from Locked State............................................ 211 Turning the Password Lock On or Off................................................ 211 Changing the Password....................212 Bluetooth Operation.....................................213 Turning Bluetooth On and Off...........213 Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device..........................214 Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device (Discoverable Mode)...........................................215 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device..........................................215 Switching Audio Route......................216 Viewing Device Details..................... 216 Editing Device Name........................ 216 Deleting Device Name...................... 217 Bluetooth Mic Gain............................217 Notification List............................................ 217 Accessing the Notification List.......... 218 Utilities......................................................... 218 Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off............................................218 s t n e t n o C 10 English Turning Keypad Tones On or Off......219 Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level..................................219 Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off............................................220 Changing the Display Mode..............220 Adjusting the Display Brightness...... 221 Controlling the Display Backlight...... 222 Locking and Unlocking the Keypad.. 222 Language..........................................223 Turning the LED Indicator On or Off. 223 Identifying Cable Type...................... 224 Voice Announcement........................224 Wallpaper Mode................................225 Screen Saver Mode.......................... 225 Audio Accessory............................... 226 Auto Keypad Lock.............................226 Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)...........226 Intelligent Audio................................ 227 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off..... 228 Text Entry Configuration................... 229 Accessing General Radio Information...................................234 Accessories..................................245 Antennas......................................................245 Audio Accessories....................................... 245 Batteries.......................................................245 Bluetooth......................................................245 Cables..........................................................245 Carry Devices.............................................. 245 Chargers......................................................246 Miscellaneous Accessories..........................246 Batteries and Chargers Warranty.........247 The Workmanship Warranty........................247 The Capacity Warranty................................247 Limited Warranty....................................248 MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS........................................... 248 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 248 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:....................... 249 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................249 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.249 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:..................................................250 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:........................................ 250 C o n t e n t s 11 English VII. GOVERNING LAW:...............................252 s t n e t n o C 12 English Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: SL7550/ SL7590/ SL7580 conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) l D e c a r a t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y 13 English Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. y t i m r o f n o C f o n o i t a r a l c e D 14 English Notes N o t e s 15 English and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with Motorola-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas, batteries, and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola, may void the users authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type n o i t a m r o f n I y t e f a S t n a t r o p m I 16 English FRC_Safety_PCR_ASTRO_New.fm Page vi Tuesday, June 18, 2013 10:55 AM Informations importantes sur la scurit Exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit pour radios bidirectionnelles portatives ATTENTION!

Cette radio ne doit tre utilise qu' des fins professionnelles. Avant d'utiliser la radio, lisez le guide Exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit pour radios bidirectionnelles portatives, qui contient d'importantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et des informations sur l'exposition aux frquences radiolectriques afin d'assurer la conformit aux normes et rglements applicables. Pour obtenir une liste d'antennes et d'autres accessoires approuvs par Motorola, consultez le site Web:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com Selon la rglementation d'Industrie Canada, cet metteur radio ne peut tre utilis qu'avec une antenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou minimal) sont approuvs par Industrie Canada pour cet metteur. Afin de limiter les interfrences radio pour les autres utilisateurs, le type et le gain de l'antenne doivent tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas plus forte qu'il ne le faut pour tablir la communication. Le prsent metteur a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne agrs par Motorola et ayant un gain admissible maximal ainsi que l'impdance requise pour chaque type d'antenne indiqu. Les types d'antenne non inclus, dont le gain est suprieur au gain maximal indiqu, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'metteur. t i r u c s a l r u s s e t n a t r o p m i s n o i t a m r o f n I vi Franais Canadien Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the radio's software version R02.30.00 or later. See Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version on page 151 to determine your radio's software version. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. S o f t w a r e V e r s o n i 17 English including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-readable form. U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,

#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,

#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,

#5,226,084 and #5,195,166. Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-

exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. The AMBE+2 voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights s t h g i r y p o C e r a w t f o S r e t u p m o C 18 English Handling Precautions The MOTOTRBO Series Digital Portable radio meets IP54 specifications, allowing the radio to withstand adverse field conditions such as being exposed to water or dust. Keep your radio clean and exposure to water should be avoided to help ensure proper functionality and performance. To clean the exterior surfaces of the radio, use a diluted solution of mild dishwashing detergent and fresh water (i.e. one teaspoon of detergent to one gallon of water). These surfaces should be cleaned whenever a periodic visual inspection reveals the presence of smudges, grease, and/or grime. Caution: The effects of certain chemicals and their vapors can have harmful results on certain plastics. Avoid using aerosol sprays, tuner cleaners and other chemicals. H a n d l i n g P r e c a u t i o n s 19 English RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guidelines and Instructions For more detailed proper usage instructions, warnings and cautions, refer to the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios booklet. To ensure a comfortable audio level and compliance with RF energy exposure limits, do not hold the radio against the ear or alongside the head. Use only in front of the face or with Motorola Solutions approved audio accessories and carry cases to ensure compliance with RF energy exposure limits. t c u d o r P d n a e r u s o p x E y g r e n E F R 20 English Notes N o t e s 21 English Selected features are also available in the multi-site trunking mode, Linked Capacity Plus. See Linked Capacity Plus on page 42 for more information. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

What are the best radio usage practices for effective communication?

What maintenance procedures will help promote longer radio life?

Getting Started How to Use This Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the MOTOTRBO Portables. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. For features that are available in both conventional Analog and Digital modes, no icon is shown. Conventional Analog Mode-Only features are not available in Connect Plus mode of operation. See Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode on page 154 for more information. For features that are available in a conventional multi-

site mode, see IP Site Connect on page 41 for more information. Selected features are also available on the single-site trunking mode, Capacity Plus. See Capacity Plus on page 42 for more information. d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 22 English Preparing Your Radio for Use Charging the Battery Your radio is powered by a Lithium-Ion (Li-lon) battery. To avoid damage and comply with warranty terms, charge the battery using a Motorola charger exactly as described in the charger user guide. All chargers can charge only Motorola authorized batteries. Other batteries may not charge. It is recommended your radio remains powered off while charging. Charge a new battery 14 to 16 hours before initial use for best performance. Prior to charging a battery with the radio, it is recommended to turn the radio off. Batteries charge best at room temperature. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o f o r U s e i The battery charging icon will be displayed until the user unplugs the USB cable or takes the radio out of the charger. 23 English Attaching the Battery Attaching the Earpiece/Audio Accessory 1 Align the battery contacts with the contacts inside the battery compartment. Insert the contact side of the battery first. Gently push the battery into place. The audio jack (

the radio. It is used to connect accessories to the

) is located on the antenna side of 2 To attach battery cover, align it in place and slide

) until it snaps into place. Slide the battery latch (

battery latch into lock position. radio. 1 Lift up the flap of the Audio Jack cover. Align the

) on both the connector and housing, indicators (

then push until it fits in properly. 2 Rotate connector clockwise or counterclockwise to lock. 3 To unlock, rotate until the indicators on both the connector and housing are aligned. Pull out the connector gently to disconnect from radio. i e s U r o f o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 24 English 1212A3A Adjusting the Volume

) up. To increase the volume, push the Volume Button

(

To decrease the volume, push the volume button down. Note: Your radio can be programmed to have a minimum volume offset where the volume level cannot be lowered past the programmed minimum volume. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Powering Up the Radio Press the On/Off button (

see a welcome message or welcome image. The LED blinks green(

).

) on the front keypad. You P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o f o r U s e i 25 English AABA Identifying Radio Controls Radio Controls 1 LED Indicator 2 Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button 3 Display 4 Microphone 5 Volume Button 6 Front Button P1[1]

7 On/Off Button 8 Emergency Button[1]

9 4way Navigation Disc 10 Antenna 11 Speaker 12 Front Button P2[1]

13 Back/Home Button 14 Menu/OK Button 15 Keypad i s l o r t n o C o d a R g n i y f i t n e d I 26 1 These buttons are programmable. English 594378211511121061413 Using the 4-Way Navigation Disc You can use the 4-way navigation disc, Numeric Values Increase/

Decrease

-

I

, to scroll through options, increase/decrease values, and navigate vertically. Category Direction Menu Lists View Details or Vertical Navigation Vertical Navigation Vertical Navigation or

-

-

Previous/Next Item i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o l s i You can use the 4-way navigation disc, number, alias, or free form text editor.

, as a button can be used to change the channels in The the home screen. Press to select your desired channel. Direction Editor Category Number Alias or

-

-

Free Form Text Move cursor up/

down or

-

Move cursor one character left/right. Move cursor one character left/right. 27 English Using the Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad to access your radios features. You can use the keypad to enter subscriber aliases or IDs, and text messages. Many characters require that you press a key multiple times. The next table shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 5

!

1 2

. 3

, 4

?

6

@

7

&

8

'

9

%

10 11

:

12

*

13

#

A D G J M P T B E H K N Q U C F I L O R V 2 3 4 5 6 S 8 7 i s l o r t n o C o d a R g n i y f i t n e d I 28 English Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 5 W 2 X 3 Y 4 8 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 0

* or del

# or space Note: Press to enter 0 and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn off the CAPS lock. Note: Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a *. Note: Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a #. Long press to change text entry method. I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o l s i 29 English Additional Radio Controls in Non-

Connect Plus Mode Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button The PTT button on the side of the radio (

two basic purposes:

) serves

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call on page 49). If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page 133) is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. During a call, if the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled on your radio (programmed by your dealer), you will hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio (the radio that is receiving your call) releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. You will also hear a continuous talk prohibit tone, if your call is interrupted, indicating that you should release the PTT button, for example when the radio receives an Emergency Call. While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. Programmable Buttons Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the duration of a button press:

Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly. i s l o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 30 English A Long press Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. Hold down Keeping the button pressed. Note: The programmed duration of a button press is applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or settings. See Emergency Operation on page 185 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. Assignable Radio Functions Actions A programmable button to access a CPS programmable action list. Audio Routing Toggles audio routing between internal and external speakers. Bluetooth Audio Switch Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Contacts Provides direct access to the Contacts list. Call Alert Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to select a contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent. Call Log Selects the call log list. Channel Announcement Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. Display Radio Alias Shows radio display name. Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Job Tickets Allows the user to view and act upon job tickets. Manual Dial Depending on the programming, initiates a Private or Phone Call by keying in any subscriber ID or phone number. Manual Site Roam[2] Starts the manual site search. 2 Not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 31 English Mic AGC On/Off Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control (AGC) on or off. Monitor Monitors a selected channel for activity. Notifications Provides direct access to the Notifications list. Nuisance Channel Delete[2] Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for the Selected Channel, from the scan list. The Selected Channel refers to the users selected zone/channel combination from which scan is initiated. One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Private, Phone or Group Call, a Call Alert or a Quick Text message. Option Board Feature Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option board-enabled channels. Permanent Monitor[2] Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Phone Provides direct access to the Phone Contacts list Power Battery Indicator Displays the current status of the battery level. Privacy Toggles privacy on or off. Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID. Radio Check Determines if a radio is active in a system. Radio Enable Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled. Radio Disable Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled. Remote Monitor Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Repeater/Talkaround[2] Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Ring Alert Type Provides direct access to the Ring Alert Type Setting. Scan[2] Toggles scan on or off. Site Info Displays current Linked Capacity Plus site name and ID. Plays site announcement voice messages for the current site (this function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled). Site Lock On/Off[2] When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 32 English radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Telemetry Control Controls the Output Pin on a local or remote radio. Text Message Selects the text message menu. Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey Stops the transmission of a remote monitored radio without giving any indicators, or an ongoing interruptible call to free the channel. Unassigned Unassigned programmable button. Voice Announcement On/Off Toggles voice announcement on or off. Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) Toggles VOX on or off. Zone Allows selection from a list of zones. Assignable Settings or Utility Functions All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Brightness Allows brightness to be set via the manual brightness mode or auto brightness control via the radios photo sensor. Display Mode Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. Wallpaper Displayed on home screen. Accessing the Programmed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following ways:

A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. Use the 4-Way Navigation Disc as follows:

1 to access the menu. Press the Press appropriate Menu Scroll button (

access the menu functions. or

) to 2 To select a function or enter a sub-menu, press the button. 3 To go back one menu level, or to return to the button. Long previous screen, press the A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 33 English button to return to the Home press the screen. Note: Your radio automatically exits the menu after a period of inactivity and returns to your Home screen. Identifying Status Indicators Display Icons Your radio has a 2 inch landscape display with QVGA

(Quarter Video Graphics Array) 16-bit color resolution. The following are icons that appear on the radios display. Icons are displayed arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l o r t n o C o d a R i Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed represents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving. l a n o i t i d d A 34 English Monitor Selected channel is being monitored. Bluetooth Not Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device connected. Bluetooth Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is connected. Bluetooth Discoverable The Bluetooth feature is enabled and radio is in discoverable mode. High Volume Data Radio is receiving high volume data and channel is busy. Job Ticket Notification Notification List has items to review. Option Board The Option Board is enabled. (Option board enabled models only) Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. Over-the-Air Programming Delay Timer Indicates time left before automatic restart of radio. Scan[3][4]

Scan feature is enabled. Scan- Priority 1[3][4]

Radio detects activity on channel/group designated as Priority 1. Scan- Priority 2[3][4]

Radio detects activity on channel/group designated as Priority 2. Flexible Receive List Flexible receive list is enabled. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. Secure The Privacy feature is enabled. Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled. Site Roaming[3]

The site roaming feature is enabled. Talkaround[3][4]

In the absence of a repeater, radio is currently configured for direct radio to radio communication. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 35 English Silent Ring Silent ring mode is enabled. Ring Only Ringing mode is enabled. Vibrate Vibrate mode is enabled. Vibrate and Ring Vibrate and Ring mode is enabled. Keypad Keypad locked. Battery The number of bars (0 4) shown indicates the charge remaining in the battery. Blinks when the battery is low. Battery Discharging Status Shows battery discharging status. All Tones Disabled No ring tones available. Call Log Radio call log. Contact Radio contact is available. Message Incoming message. 3 Not applicable in Capacity Plus 4 Not applicable in Linked Capacity Plus

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 36 English Call Icons The following icons appear on the radios display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate ID type. Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. Group Call/All Call Indicates a Group Call or All Call in progress. Phone Call as Private Call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a phone alias (name) or ID

(number). Phone Call as Group/All Call Indicates a Phone Call as Group/All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID

(number). Bluetooth PC Call Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a Bluetooth PC Call alias

(name) or ID (number). Private Call Alert In the Contacts list, it indicates a subscriber alias (name) or ID

(number). Utilities Icons The following icons appear beside menu items on the radios display that offer the following options. Checkbox (Empty) Indicates the option is not selected. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates the option is selected. Brightness A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 37 English Indicates the brightness level. Brightness Highlighted Highlights the brightness level. Sent Item Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner of the radios display in the Sent Items folder. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 38 English Mini Notice Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the radios display after an action to perform task is taken. Successful Transmission

(Positive) Successful action taken. Failed Transmission (Negative) Failed action taken. Transmission in Progress

(Transitional) Transmitting. This is seen before indication for Successful Transmission or Failed Transmission. Sent Successfully The text message is sent successfully. Individual or Group Message Read The text message has been read. Individual or Group Message Unread The text message has not been read. Send Failed The text message has not been sent. OR OR OR OR OR In-Progress The text message to a group alias or ID is pending transmission. The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledgement. Job Tickets Icons All Jobs Indicates all jobs listed. New Jobs Indicates new jobs. LED Indicator The LED indicator (

) shows the operational status of A d d i t i o n a l your radio. Blinking red Radio is transmitting at low battery condition, receiving an emergency transmission or has failed the self-

test upon powering up. Solid yellow Radio is monitoring a digital conventional channel or in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Also indicates fair battery charge when programmable button is pressed. Radio is scanning for activity or receiving a Call Alert, flexible receive Blinking yellow i R a d o C o n t r o l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 39 English A list is enabled or all local Linked Capacity Plus channels are busy. Radio is no longer connected to the repeater while in Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus; all Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus channels are currently busy . Auto Roaming is enabled, radio is actively searching for a new site, or radio has yet to respond to a group call alert. Also indicates that radio has yet to respond to a group call alert, or radio is locked. Also indicates full charge of the battery when the programmable button is pressed. Radio is powering up, receiving a non-privacy- enabled call or data, detecting activity, or retrieving Over-

the-Air Programming transmissions over the air. Rapidly blinking green Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data. Note:

While in conventional mode, when the LED blinks green, it indicates the radio detects activity over the air. Due to the nature of the digital protocol, this activity may or may not affect the radio's programmed channel. For Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus, there is no LED indication when the radio is detecting activity over the air. Audio Tones Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the radios status or the radios response to data received. High pitched tone Continuous Tone Low pitched tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination. Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting. Double blinking yellow

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l o r t n o C o d a R i Blinking green l a n o i t i d d A 40 English High pitched tone Periodic Tone Repetitive Tone Momentary Tone Low pitched tone Sounds periodically depending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user. Sounds only once for a short period of time defined by the radio. Indicator Tones High pitched tone Low pitched tone Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-

Connect Plus Modes To switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you must change to another zone, if programmed by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to see if your radio has been programmed with non-Connect Plus zones, and what features are available while operating in non-

Connect Plus zones. IP Site Connect This feature allows your radio to extend conventional communication beyond the reach of a single site, by connecting to different available sites which are connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, it connects to the new site's repeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your settings, this is done automatically or manually. If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 41 English detect any signal from the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value. In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have the strongest signal) and locks on to it. Note: Each channel can only have either Scan or Roam enabled, not both at the same time. Channels with this feature enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches the channel(s) in the roam list during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. A roam list supports a maximum of 16 channels

(including the Selected Channel). Note: You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Capacity Plus Capacity Plus is a single-site trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool of channels to support hundreds of users and up to 254 Groups. This feature allows your radio to efficiently utilize the available number of programmed channels while in Repeater Mode. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity Plus via a programmable button press. Your radio also has features that are available in conventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. However, the minor differences in the way each feature works does NOT affect the performance of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on this configuration. Linked Capacity Plus Linked Capacity Plus is a multi-site multi-channel trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, combining the best of both Capacity Plus and IP Site Connect configurations. Linked Capacity Plus allows your radio to extend trunking communication beyond the reach of a single site, by connecting to different available sites which are connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network. It also provides an increase in capacity by efficiently

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 42 English utilizing the combined available number of programmed channels supported by each of the available sites. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, it connects to the new site's repeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your settings, this is done automatically or manually. If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value. In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have the strongest signal) and locks on to it. Any channel with Linked Capacity Plus enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches these channels during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. Note: You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Similar to Capacity Plus, icons of features not applicable to Linked Capacity Plus are not available in the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Linked Capacity Plus via a programmable button press. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on this configuration. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 43 English Making and Receiving Calls Selecting a Site A site provides coverage for a specific area. A Connect Plus site has a site controller and a maximum of 15 repeaters. In a multi-site network, the Connect Plus radio will automatically search for a new site when the signal level from the current site drops to an unacceptable level. Roam Request A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable. Note: This is programmed by your dealer. Press the programmed Roam Request button. You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site Number>. s l l a C g n i v i e c e R d n a g n k a M i Site Restriction 44 Your Connect Plus radio system administrator has the ability to decide which network sites your radio is and English is not allowed to use. Your radio does not need to be reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a disallowed site, you see a brief message stating:

Site <number given> Not Allowed. The radio then searches for a different network site. Selecting a Zone A zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports up to 250 zones, with a maximum of 160 channels per zone. 1 Access the Zone feature. Radio Controls Programmed Zone button Radio menu Steps Press the programmed Zone button. 1 2 to access the menu. or press to Zone and to select. The current zone is displayed and indicated by a

. 2 Select the required zone. Radio Control or Steps or zone. and scroll to the required Keypad 1 Enter the first character of the required zone. 2 A blinking cursor appears allowing you to continue entering the subsequent characters of the required zone. key to to move one space to to move one space Note: Press the left. Press to the right. Press the delete any unwanted characters. Note: The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The second line shows a zone that matches what you have already keyed in. The alias search is case-

insensitive. If there are two or more Radio Control Steps zones matches the keyed in characters, the radio displays the zone that is listed first in the zone list. 3 to select. Press The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. Selecting a Channel Transmissions are sent and received on a channel. Depending on your radios configuration, each channel may have been programmed differently to support different groups of users or supplied with different features. After selecting the relevant Zone, select the relevant channel you require to transmit or receive on. i M a k n g a n d R e c e i v i n g C a l l s 45 English On the navigation disc, press to access the Channel List (while on the Home Screen). The active channel is displayed and indicated by a

. Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once the channel, subscriber ID or group ID is displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. Note: The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call . To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID

(programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). Note: See Privacy on page 111 for more information. Receiving and Responding to a Group Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home screen), the LED blinks green. The first line of the display shows the caller alias, and the RSSI icon. The second line displays the group alias and the Group Call icon (in Digital mode only). Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to stop the current call from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to talk/respond. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. the Talk Permit Tone s l l a C g n i v i e c e R d n a g n k a M i 46 English the PTT Sidetone 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Note: See Making a Group Call on page 50 for details on making a Group Call. Note: If the radio receives a Group Call while not on the Home screen, it remains on its current screen prior to answering the call. Note: Long press the screen to view the caller alias before replying. button to go to the Home Receiving and Responding to a Private Call A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks green. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line displays Private Call and the Private Call icon. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to stop the current call from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to talk/respond. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. See Making a Private Call on page 51 for details on making a Private Call. i M a k n g a n d R e c e i v i n g C a l l s 47 English Receiving an All Call An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the channel. It is used to make important announcements requiring the users full attention. When you receive an All Call, a tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The first line of the display shows the caller alias, and the RSSI icon. The second line displays All Call and the All Call icon. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker. Once the All Call ends, the radio returns to the previous screen before receiving the call. An All Call does not wait for a predetermined period of time before ending. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you will hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is now available for use. You cannot respond to an All Call. Note: See Making an All Call on page 52 for details on making an All Call. Note: The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. During an All Call, you will not be able to use any programmed button functions until the call ends. Receiving and Responding to a Phone Call Phone Call as Private Call When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call, the Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner; the display shows the caller alias or Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. 1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 2 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows All Call and Call Ended. s l l a C g n i v i e c e R d n a g n k a M i 48 English If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 2 on page 48 to end the call. Phone Call as Group Call When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call, 1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 2 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows All Call and Call Ended. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 2 on page 49 to end the call. Phone Call as All Call When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, the Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner; the display shows All Call and Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Note: When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, you can respond to the call or end the call, only if an All Call type is assigned to the channel. 1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 2 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows All Call and Call Ended. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 3 to end the call. i M a k n g a n d R e c e i v i n g C a l l s Making a Radio Call After selecting your channel, you can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:

The PTT button. A programmed One Touch Access button The One Touch Access feature allows you to make a 49 English Group or Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. The programmed number keys This method is for Group, Private and All Calls only and is used with the keypad (see Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key on page 55). A programmable button This method is for Phone Calls only (see Making a Phone Call with the Programmable Phone Button on page 56). The Contacts list (see Contact Settings on page 70). Manual Dial This method is for Private and Phone Calls only and is dialed using the keypad

(see Making a Private Call from Contacts on page 72, and ). Note: Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key OR the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. Note: See Privacy on page 111 for more information. Making a Group Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. 1 Do one of the following. Select the channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 45 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the group call alias. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radios speaker. You see the s l l a C g n i v i e c e R d n a g n k a M i 50 English Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID on your display. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Making a Private Call While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. There are two types of Private Calls. The first type, where a radio presence check is performed prior to setting up the call, while the other sets up the call immediately. Only one of these call types can be programmed to your radio by your dealer. You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you make a Private Call via the Contacts list, Call Log, One Touch Access button, the programmed number keys, or the Channel Selector Knob, if this feature is not enabled. Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to contact an individual radio. See Text Message Features on page 94 or Call Alert Operation on page 87 for more information. 1 Do one of the following. Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 45 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. i M a k n g a n d R e c e i v i n g C a l l s 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. If you release the PTT button while the radio is setting up the call, it exits without any indication and returns to the previous screen. The LED lights up solid green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radios speaker. The Private Call icon appears on the top 51 English right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status.. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radio's speaker. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see negative mini notice on the display. s l l a C g n i v i e c e R d n a g n k a M i 52 English Making an All Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the channel. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. 1 Select the channel with the active All Call group alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 45 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green.The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows All Call. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. Making a Phone Call with the One Touch Access Button 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Phone Call to the predefined alias or ID. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:. to proceed. Enter the access code and press The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The Phone Call icon remains in the top right corner. If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, enter the extra digits using the keypad and press The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press, and the radio returns to the previous screen. to proceed. 4 Press to end the call. If de-access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows De-Access Code:. Press the One Touch Access button, if it is programmed with the de-access code. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press, and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 4 on page 53 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. i M a k n g a n d R e c e i v i n g C a l l s 53 English Note:

When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. to dismiss the During channel access, press call attempt. A tone sounds to indicate success. During the call, if you press the One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button Note: Programmable buttons press must be initiated from the Home screen. The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you will hear a short alert tone the moment the s l l a C g n i v i e c e R d n a g n k a M i 54 English target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key The Programmable Number Key feature allows you to make a Group, Private or All Call to a predefined alias or ID easily. This feature can be assigned to all the available number keys on a keypad. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a number key, but you can have more than one number key associated to an alias or ID. 1 Long press the programmed number key, when you are on the Home screen, to make a Group, Private or All Call to the predefined alias or ID. If the number key is not associated to an entry, a negative indicator tone sounds. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radios speaker. The Group/Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays either the call status for a Private Call or All Call for All Call. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radio's speaker.. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the call ends. i M a k n g a n d R e c e i v i n g C a l l s 55 English See Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key on page 78 for details on assigning an entry to a number key on the keypad. Making a Phone Call with the Programmable Phone Button 1 Press the programmed Phone button to enter into the Phone Entry list. 2 or to the required subscriber alias or ID, button to to select. and press If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:. Enter the access code and press the proceed. The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The Phone Call icon remains in the top right corner. If call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 3 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 5 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. button to proceed. The s l l a C g n i v i e c e R d n a g n k a M i 56 English 6 Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. to end the call. button to proceed. The radio Press If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-

Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press the returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Steps 4 on page 56 and 5 on page 56 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. to Note: During channel access, press dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. Note: During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. Note: The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. i M a k n g a n d R e c e i v i n g C a l l s Stopping a Radio Call This feature allows you to stop an ongoing Group or Private Call to free the channel for transmission. For example, when a radio experiences a stuck microphone condition where the PTT button is inadvertently pressed by the user. 57 English Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. 1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey button, while on the relevant channel. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Remote Dekey Success, indicating that the channel is now free. The display shows Call Interrupted, and the radio sounds a negative indicator tone until the PTT button is released, if it is transmitting an interruptible call that is stopped via this feature. OR The radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows Remote Dekey Failed. Talkaround You can continue to communicate when your repeater is not operating, or when your radio is out of the repeaters range but within talking range of other radios. This is called talkaround. Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. The Talkaround setting is retained even after powering down. You can toggle between talkaround and repeater modes by pressing the programmed Repeater/

Talkaround button OR using the radio menu as described next. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Talkaround and press to select. You can also use option. or to change the selected Press to enable/disable the Talkaround. s l l a C g n i v i e c e R d n a g n k a M i 58 English The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. beside Enabled. Permanent Monitor Monitoring Features Monitoring a Channel Use the Monitor feature to make sure a channel is clear before transmitting. This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. 1 Press and hold the programmed Monitor button and listen for activity. The Monitor icon appears on the display and the LED lights up solid yellow. You hear radio activity or total silence, depending on how your radio is programmed. This indicates that the channel is in use. 2 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. Use the Permanent Monitor feature to continuously monitor a selected channel for activity. Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. 1 Press the programmed Permanent Monitor button to activate permanent monitoring of the channel. Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED lights up solid yellow, and the display shows Permanent Monitor On. The Monitor icon appears on the display. 2 Press the programmed Permanent Monitor button to exit Permanent Monitor mode. Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED turns off, and display shows Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED turns off. i M a k n g a n d R e c e i v i n g C a l l s 59 English Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode Radio Check If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. Sending a Radio Check 1 Access the Radio Check feature. Radio Control Programmed Radio Check button Menu Steps 1 Press the programmed Radio Check button. or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu 2 1

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 60 English Radio Control Steps 2 or press to Contacts and to select 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID select the subscriber alias or ID directly or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu or to Manual to Dial and press select. Radio Control Steps or to Radio Number and press to select. If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Else, the first line of the display shows Radio Number:; the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID, and press select. to or to Radio Check and press to select. 4 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. button is pressed when the radio is If the waiting for acknowledgement, a tone sounds, and the radio terminates all retries and exits Radio Check mode. If Radio Check is successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If Radio Check is unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. Remote Monitor Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs only). No audible or visual indication is given to the target radio. You can use this feature to monitor, A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 61 English remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Initiating Remote Monitor 1 Access the Remote Monitor feature. Radio Control Program med Remote Monitor Button Menu Steps 2 1 2 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu or press to Contacts and to select 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 62 English Radio Control Steps select the subscriber alias or ID directly or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu or to Manual to Dial and press select. or to Radio Number and press select. to If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Else, the first line of the display shows Radio Control Steps Radio Number:; the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press select. to or press to Remote Mon. and to select. 4 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. Your radio starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration and display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone the display shows negative mini notice. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/ groups. Your radio cycles through the programmed scan list for the current channel looking for voice activity. At each channel in the cycle the radio also cycles through the group list for that channel. Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with a maximum of 16 members in a list. You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editing a scan list. You can attach a new scan list to your radio via Front Panel Programming. Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. Viewing an Entry in the Scan List 1 to access the menu. 63 English 2 3 or to Scan and press to select. or select. to View/Edit List and press to 4 Use or to view each member on the list. The Priority icon appears left of the members alias, if set, to indicate whether the member is on a Priority 1 or Priority 2 channel list. You cannot have multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2 channels in a scan list. There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None. Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. to View/Edit List and press to 4 Key in the first character of the required alias. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 64 English A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to type the required alias. to key to move one space to the left. Press Press move one space to the right. Press the to delete any unwanted characters. The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The second line of the display shows an alias that matches what you have keyed in. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the radio displays the entry that is listed first in the scan list. Editing the Scan List Adding a New Entry to the Scan List 1 2 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. 3 4 or select. to View/Edit List and press to or to Add Member and press to select. 5 Select the required alias or ID by Radio Control Radio Navigation Buttons Keypad Steps or to the required alias or ID. Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. to move one space to the to move one space to Press left. Press the right. Press the key to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method. Radio Control Steps The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the short listed search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the list. Press to select. to the required priority level and press 6 7 or to select. The display shows Entry Saved, followed immediately by Add Another?. 8 Do one of the following:

or to Yes and press to select, and repeat Steps 5 on page 65 to 7 on page 65. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 65 English or to No and press current list. to save the Radio Control Steps

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Deleting an Entry from the Scan List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. to View/Edit List and press to 4 Select the required alias or ID by Radio Control Radio Navigation Buttons Keypad Steps or to the required alias or ID. Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. 66 English to move one space to the to move one space to Press left. Press the right. Press the key to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method. The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the short listed search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the list. 5 6 Press to select. or to Delete and press to select. 7 Do one of the following:

At Delete Entry?, or to Yes and press to delete entry. The display shows Entry Deleted. or to No and press to return to the previous screen. 8 Repeat Steps 4 on page 66 to 7 on page 67 to delete other entries. After deleting all required aliases or IDs, long press to return to the Home screen. Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the Scan List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. to View/Edit List and press to 4 Select the required alias or ID by Radio Control Radio Navigation Buttons Keypad Steps or to the required alias or ID. Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. to move one space to the to move one space to Press left. Press the right. Press the key to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method. The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the short listed search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 67 English Radio Control Steps the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the list. Press to select. or select. to Edit Priority and press to to the required priority level and press or to select. The display shows Entry Saved before returning to the previous screen. Note:

The Priority icon appears left of the members name. There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None. Scan When you start a scan, your radio cycles through the programmed scan list for the current channel looking for voice activity. The LED blinks yellow and you see the Scan icon on the display. There are two ways of initiating scan:

Main Channel Scan (Manual): Your radio scans all the channels/groups in your scan list. On entering scan, your radio may depending on the settings automatically start on the last scanned active channel/group or on the channel where scan was initiated. Auto Scan (Automatic): Your radio automatically starts scanning when you select a channel/group that has Auto Scan enabled. Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. Setting an Active Scan List 1 to access the menu. 5 6 7

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 68 English 2 3 4 or to Scan and press to select. or select. or select. to Set Active List and press to 4 to the required list and press to The list selected will be your active scan list. The display shows Turn On if scan is disabled. The display shows Turn Off if scan is enabled. to select. Press The LED blinks yellow and the Scan icon is displayed, when Scan is enabled. The LED turns off and the Scan icon is not displayed, when Scan is disabled. Starting and Stopping Scan Responding to a Transmission During a Scan While scanning, the radio will only accept data (e.g. text message, location, telemetry, or PC data) if received on its Selected Channel. You can start and stop scanning by pressing the programmed Scan button OR follow the procedure described next. 1 Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a channel programmed with a scan list. 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. During scanning, your radio stops on a channel/group where activity is detected. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker.The radio stays on that channel while the activity is present and for a programmed time period known as hang time. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 69 English 2 Press the PTT button during hang time. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio returns to scanning other channels/groups. Deleting a Nuisance Channel If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise (termed a nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to the channel designated as the Selected Channel. Deleting a nuisance channel is only possible through the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button. This feature is not accessible through the menu. 1 When your radio locks on to an unwanted or nuisance channel, press the programmed

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 70 English Nuisance Channel Delete button until you hear a tone. 2 Release the Nuisance Channel Delete button. The nuisance channel is deleted. Restoring a Nuisance Channel To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one of the following:

Turn the radio off and then power it on again. Stop and restart a scan via the programmed Scan button or menu. Change channel or zone. Contact Settings Contacts provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. Each entry, depending on context, associates with one of five types of calls: Group Call, Private Call, All Call, PC Call or Dispatch Call. PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only available with the applications. Refer to the data applications documentation for more information. Note:

If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make privacy-enabled Group Call, Private Call, and All Call on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key OR the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. See Privacy on page 111 for more information. Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign each entry to a programmable number key or more on a keypad. If an entry is assigned to a number key, your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry. Your radio supports maximum of 1000 Contact list entries. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:

Call Type Call Alias Call ID Note:

You can add or edit subscriber IDs for the Digital Contacts list. Making a Group Call from Contacts 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required group alias or ID. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The first line displays the subscriber alias or ID. The second line displays Private Call and the Private Call icon 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. When any user in the group responds, the LED blinks green, the display shows the transmitting user's ID, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radio's speaker. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 71 English 8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. 9 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Making a Private Call from Contacts 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:

select the subscriber alias or ID directly or to the required subscriber alias or

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A ID and press to select. 72 English use the Manual Dial menu or select. or to select. to Manual Dial and press to to Radio Number and press If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Else, the first line of the display shows Radio Number:; the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID. Press to select. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The first line displays the subscriber alias or ID. The second line displays Private Call and the Private Call icon. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green and the display shows the transmitting user's ID. the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radio's speaker. 8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. Making a Phone Call from Contacts 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:

select the subscriber alias or ID directly or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu or select. or to select. to Manual Dial and press to to Phone Number and press The first line of the display shows Phone Number: , the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to to enter a telephone number, and press select the entered number. If the entry selected is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid # . When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 73 English 4 or to Call Phone and press to select. 5 If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code: . The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press to proceed. the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 Do one of the following:

During channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a negative indicator tone sounds. Your radio returns to the Call Phone screen. The access code cannot be more than 10 characters. The first line of the display shows Calling. The second line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. Note:

The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, press any keypad key to begin the input of extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits: . The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio to proceed. The DTMF

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 74 English returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Press One Touch Access button. Note:

The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, your radio responds to On/ Off/Volume Control Knob and Channel Selector Knob only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. to proceed. shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press The deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Call Phone screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Steps 8 on page 75 and 9 on page 75 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 8 Press to end the call. 9 If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-

Access Code:. The second line of the display Making a Call Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. Note:

75 English button or to exit alias search. Press If you release the PTT button while the radio is setting up the call, it exits without any indication and returns to the previous screen. Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see negative mini notice on the display. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. 4 Use the keypad to type the required alias. to move one space to the left. Press Press move one space to the right. Press the to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to key

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A to change text entry method. 76 English The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the short listed search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the radio displays the entry that is listed first in the Contacts list. 5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the destination alias. 7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 8 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radios speaker. 9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. Note:

button or to exit alias search. Press If you release the PTT button while the radio is setting up the call, it exits without any indication and returns to the previous screen. Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see Party Not Available on the display; the radio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radio presence check. 2 or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. 4 Use the keypad to type the required alias. to key to move one space to the left. Press Press move one space to the right. Press the to delete any unwanted characters. The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The second line of the display shows an alias that matches what you have keyed in. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the radio displays the entry that is listed first in the Contacts list. 5 or to scroll to desired entry, if necessary. 6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 1 to access the menu. 7 Press the PTT button to make the call. 77 English The LED lights up solid green. The first line displays the target radios ID. The second line displays the call type and the Call icon. 8 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 9 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 10 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you will hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key Note: See Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key on page 55 for details on making a Group, Private or All Call with the programmed number key(s). t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 78 English 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. to the required alias or ID and press or to select. or select. to Program Key and press to to the desired number key and press or to select. If the number key is currently assigned to another entry, the display shows The Key is Already Assigned and then, the first line of the display shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following. to overwrite or to Yes and press the number key assignment. or to No and press to return to the previous step. Each entry can be associated to different number before each number key that is keys. You see a assigned to an entry. If the is before Empty, that number key is not assigned. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Removing the Association between Entry and Programmable Number Key 1 Access the required alias or ID via:

Radio Control Steps Programmed number key Long press the programmed number key to the required alias or ID; press to select. Menu 1 to access the menu 2 3 4 Radio Control Steps 2 3 or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. or select. to Program Key and press to or to Empty and press to select. The first line of the display shows Clear from all keys? . A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. or to Yes and press to select. Note: When an entry is deleted, the association between the entry and its programmed number key(s) is removed. 79 English The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. 7 If adding a Radio Contact, or required ringer type and press The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. to the to select. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Adding a New Contact Sending a Message to a Contact 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. or select. to New Contact and press to or to the required contact type, either Radio Contact or Phone Contact, and press to select. 5 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and press to confirm. 6 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. or select. to New Contact and press to or to the required contact type, either Radio Contact or Phone Contact, and press to select. or select. to the required alias and press to press to confirm. 80 English 6 7 or select. to Send Message and press to Press to send the message. Call Indicator Settings Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Call Alert. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alert and press to to Call Ringers and press to or select. or 5 6 7 to Call Alert and press

. The current tone is indicated by a to select. or select. to the required tone and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected appears beside selected tone. Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Private Call. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 81 English or select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to to Call Ringers and press to to Private Call and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable the Private Call Press ringing tones. The display shows Call ringing tones are enabled. The Call ringing tones are disabled. disappears from beside Enabled, if Private beside Enabled, if Private Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Text Message. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to to Call Ringers and press to to Text Message and press or select. The current tone is indicated by a

. to 3 4 5 6 7

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English 7 or select. to the required tone and press to appears beside selected tone. Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Telemetry Status with Text. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to to Call Ringers and press to or to Telemetry and press to select. The current tone is indicated by a

. 7 Do one of the following:

or to the preferred tone and press to select. The display shows Tone <Number>

Selected and a appears left of the selected tone. or to Turn Off and press to select. The display shows Telemetry Ringer Off and a appears left of Turn Off. Assigning Ring Styles You can program your radio to sound one of ten predefined ringing tones when receiving a Call Alert or a Text Message from a particular contact. The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through the list. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 83 English to the required alias or ID and press or to select. 3 Go to Radio Settings. SelectTones/Alerts. Select All Tones. Toggle All Tones to be enabled or disabled. or to View/Edit and press to select. Ring Alert Type Selection or to Ringer and press to select. or select. A to required ring style and press to indicates the current selected tone. or select. The display shows Contact Saved. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. to You can program your the radio calls to one predeternined vibrate call. If All Tones status is disabled, the radio displays the All Tone Mute icon. If All Tones status is enabled, the related ring alert type is displayed. The radio sounds one vibration if it is a momentary ring style. The radio will vibrate repetitively if it is a repetitive ring style. When set to Ring & Vibrate, the radio sounds a specific ring tone if there is any incoming radio transaction (i.e. Call Alert, Message or Job Ticket). It sounds like a good key tone or missed call. If the notification list is not empty, the radio repeats a vibration every 5 minutes. to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 3 4 5 6 7

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A All Tones 1 2 84 English 3 Go to Radio Settings. Select Tones/Alerts. Select Ring Alert Type. 4 Choose from one of the following:

Ring Vibrate Vibrate & Ring Silent Escalating Alarm Tone Volume You can program your radio to continually alert you when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to 4 5 6 or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to or to Escalert and press to select. You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable the Escalert. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Call Log Features Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log feature to view and manage recent calls. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:

Store ID to Contacts Delete View Details A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 85 English Viewing Recent Calls The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Call Log and press to select. or to preferred list and press to select. The display shows the most recent entry at the top of the list. or to view the list. Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with the current selected alias or ID. Missed Call Screen Whenever a call is missed, your radio displays a missed call message in the notification list. The display shows Missed Calls. Do one of the following:

Press missed call log list appears on display. to view the missed call ID. The Press to store or delete the entry. Storing an Alias from a Call List You can also store an ID without an alias. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Call Log and press to select. or select. to the required list and press to or to Store and press to select. A blinking cursor appears. If needed, key in the alias for that ID and press positive mini notice. The display shows Deleting a Call from a Call List 1 2 to access the menu. or to Call Log and press to select. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English 3 4 5 to to the required list and press or select. When you select a call list and it contains no entries, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 129). to the required alias or ID and press or to select. or select. to Delete Entry? and press to 6 Do one of the following:

Viewing Details from a Call List 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Call Log and press to select. or select. to the required list and press to to the required alias or ID and press or to select. to View Details and press or select. Display shows details. to Press display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes to delete the entry. The Call Alert Operation or to No, and press the return to the previous screen. button to Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only and is accessible through the menu via Contacts or manual dial. 87 English A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert When you receive a Call Alert page, you see the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio on the display. When you hear a repetitive tone and the LED blinks yellow, do one of the following:

Press the PTT button while the display still shows the Call Alert in the Notification List to respond with a Private Call. Press alert is moved to the Missed Call Log. to exit the Notification List. The See Notification List on page 127 for details about the Notification List. See Call Log Features on page 85 for details about the Missed Call List. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:

select the subscriber alias or ID directly or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu or select. or to select. to Manual Dial and press to to Radio Contact and press The first line of the display shows Radio Number: , the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the subscriber ID you want to page and press Making a Call Alert from the Contact List

. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. 4 or to Call Alert and press to select. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 88 English The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows negative mini notice. Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias or ID. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows negative mini notice. Emergency Operation An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time on any screen display even when there is activity on the current channel. Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:

The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. Note:

If the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:

Emergency Alarm A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 89 English Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow Note: Only ONE of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to the programmed Emergency button. In addition, each alarm has the following types:

Regular Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Silent Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any sound through the radios speaker, until you press the PTT button to initiate the call. Silent with Voice Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to sound through the radios speaker. Receiving an Emergency Alarm On receiving an emergency alarm the emergency icon appears, a tone sounds, the LED blinks red and the radio displays the emergency caller alias. If more than one alarm has occurred all emergency caller aliases are displayed in an Alarm List. 1 When receiving an emergency alarm, do one of the following:

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English If a single emergency call alias is displayed, press to view your action details. to view more details. press again If the multiple emergency caller aliases are displayed in the Alarm List, required alias and press details. Press items. or to the to view more again to view your action 2 Press To revisit the Alarm List, press menu and select Alarm List. and select Yes to exit the Alarm List. to access the Responding to an Emergency Alarm 1 In the Alarm List, or to the required alias. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you will hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is now available for use. 3 Press PTT button to transmit non-emergency voice to the same group that the Emergency Alarm was targeted to. Emergency voice can only be transmitted by the emergency initiating radio. All other radios

(including the emergency receiving radio) transmit non-emergency voice. The LED lights up solid green. Your radio remains in the Emergency mode. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds, the LED blinks green, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radio's speaker.You see the Group Call icon, the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your display. 6 Your radio displays the Alarm List. Sending an Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of radios. If your radio is set to Silent, it will not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode. Press the programmed Emergency On button. The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon appears on the Home screen display. When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received, the Emergency tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent. If your radio does not receive an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement, and after all retries have been exhausted, a tone sounds and the display shows Alarm Failed. Radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and returns to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 91 English Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by a radio within the group, the group of radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. If your radio is set to Silent, it will not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, or allow any received calls to sound through the radios speaker, until you press the PTT button to initiate the call. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it will not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, but allow incoming calls to sound through the radios speaker. The indicators will only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate, or respond to, the call. When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is received, the Emergency tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green and the Group icon appears on the display. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. 6 Press the PTT button to respond. The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon appears on the Home screen display. 7 Once your call ends, press Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode. The radio returns to the Home screen. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 92 English Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to a group of radios. Your radios microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled, repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made for a programmed duration. Note: During Emergency Cycle Mode, received calls sound through the radios speaker. If you press the PTT button during the programmed programmed receiving period, you will hear a prohibit tone, indicating that you should release the PTT button. The radio ignores the PTT press and remains in Emergency mode. Note: If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. If your radio is set to Silent, it will not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, or allow any received calls to sound through the radios speaker, until the programmed hot mic transmission period is over, and you press the PTT button. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it will not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when you are making the call with hot mic, but allow sound through the radios speaker when the target radio responds after the programmed hot mic transmission period is over. The indicators will only appear when you press the PTT button. Note: If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic state directly. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon is displayed. 2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly into the microphone. When hot mic has been enabled, the radio automatically transmits without a PTT press until the hot mic duration expires. While transmitting, A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 93 English the LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon appears on the display. 3 The radio automatically stops transmitting when the cycling duration between hot mic and receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is enabled. 4 Once the hot mic duration expires, the radio automatically stops transmitting. To transmit again, press the PTT button. Reinitiating an Emergency Mode Note: This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the Emergency Alarm. There are two instances where this can happen:

You change the channel while the radio is in Emergency mode. This exits the Emergency mode. If Emergency Alarm is enabled on this new channel, the radio reinitiates Emergency. You press the programmed Emergency On button during an Emergency initiation/transmission state. This causes the radio to exit this state, and to reinitiate Emergency. Exiting Emergency Mode Note: This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the Emergency Alarm. Your radio exits Emergency mode when one of the following occurs:

Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received

(for Emergency Alarm only) All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted The Emergency Off button is pressed. Note:

If your radio is powered off, it exits the Emergency mode. The radio will not reinitiate the Emergency mode automatically when it is turned on again. If you change channels when your radio is in Emergency mode to a channel that has no emergency system configured, No Emergency is shown on your display. Text Message Features Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or an e-mail application. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 94 English The maximum length of characters for a text message, including the subject line (seen when receiving message from an e-mail application), is 140 whereas for receiving this is 280 characters. Note: Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Writing and Sending a Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. to Messages or to select. and press 2 or to Compose and press to select. A blinking cursor appears. 3 Use the keypad to type your message. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. to change text entry or 4 Press once message is composed. 5 Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-

edit, or delete the newly composed message, do one of the following. to Send, and press to send the or message. or to Save, and press message to the Drafts folder. to save the to edit the message. again to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. 95 English If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 100 Sending a Quick Text Message Your radio supports a maximum of 50 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 to access the menu. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 96 English Radio Controls Steps 2 or to Messages to select. and press 2 3 or to Quick Text and press to select. to the required Quick Text and press or to select. 4 Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. to change text entry or 5 Press once message is composed. 6 Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-

edit, or delete the newly composed message, do one of the following. to Send, and press to send the or message. or to Save, and press message to the Drafts folder. to save the to edit the message. again to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder. 7 If you are sending the message, select the recipient by or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. The display shows , transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 100). Sending a Quick Text Message Press the programmed One Touch Access button to send a predefined Quick Text message to a predefined alias or ID. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 100). A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 97 English Accessing the Drafts Folder You can save a text message to send it at a later time. If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen while you are in the process of writing or editing a text message, your current text message is automatically saved to the Drafts folder. The most recent saved text message is always added to the top of the Drafts list. The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note:

Radio Controls Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages to select. and press 2 3 or to Drafts and press to select. or to select. to the required message and press Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message at any time to return to the Home Long press screen. Viewing a Saved Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to Edit and press to select. A blinking cursor appears. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 98 English 3 Use the keypad to type your message. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. to change text entry or 4 Press once message is composed. 5 Select the message recipient by or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved to the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send Failed icon. Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages to select. and press A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 2 3 or to Drafts and press to select. or to select. to the required message and press 99 English 4 5 Press again while viewing the message. or to Delete and press to delete the text message. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages You can select one of the following options while at the Resend option screen:

Resend Forward Edit Note: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a match, you can only edit and forward a Fail-to-Send message. Resending a Text Message to resend the same message to the Press same subscriber/group alias or ID. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. 100 English If the message cannot be sent, the display shows negative mini notice. Forwarding a Text Message Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/ group alias or ID. 1 or to Forward and press to select. 2 Select the message recipient by or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. The display shows Text Message:

<Subscriber/Group Alias or ID>, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Editing a Text Message Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. Note: If a subject line is present (for messages received from an e-mail application), you cannot edit it. 1 or to Edit and press to select. A blinking cursor appears. 2 Use the keypad to edit your message. 4 Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-

edit, or delete the newly composed message, do one of the following. to Send, and press to send the or message. or to Save, and press message to the Drafts folder. to save the to edit the message. again to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder. 5 If you are sending the message, select the to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. or to change text entry recipient by or 3 Press once message is composed. to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 101 English The display shows Text Message:

<Subscriber/Group Alias or ID>, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Managing Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items list. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note: Long press Home screen. Viewing a Sent Text Message at any time to return to the 1 Access the Text Message feature. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 102 English Radio Controls Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages to select. and press or to Sent Items and press to select. or to the required message and press to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item Icons on page 38). 2 3 Sending a Sent Text Message You can select one of the following options while viewing a sent text message:

Resend Forward Edit Delete Note: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a match, you can only edit, forward, or delete a Sent message. 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to one of the options described next to select. and press Option Steps Forward Select Forward to send the selected text message to another subscriber/

group alias or ID (see Forwarding a Text Message on page 100). Select Edit to edit the selected text message before sending it (see Editing a Text Message on page 101). Edit Option Steps Delete Select Delete to delete the text message. Resend Select Resend to resend the selected text message to the same subscriber/

group alias or ID. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming that the same message is being sent to the same target radio. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option to resend the screen. Press message to the same subscriber/group alias or ID. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 103 English Option Steps Note: Changing the volume, and pressing any button, except for

, or

, returns you to the

, message. Note: The radio exits the Resend option screen if you press the PTT button to initiate a Private or Group Call, or to respond to a Group Call. The radio also exits the screen when it receives a text or telemetry message, an emergency call or alarm, or a call alert. Note: The display returns to the Resend option screen if you press the PTT button to respond to a Private Call

(except when the radio is displaying the Missed Call screen), and at the end of an All Call. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-

Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-

Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. to Messages or to select. and press

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 104 English 2 3 or to Sent Items and press to select. When you select Sent Items and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 129). or to Delete All and press to select. 4 Choose one of the following. or to Yes and ppress to select. The display shows positive mini notice. or to No and press to return to the previous screen. Receiving a Text Message When your radio receives a message, the display shows the alias or ID of the sender and the Message icon at the far left of the screen. You can select Read when receiving a text message. Note:

The radio exits the Text Message alert screen and sets up a Private or Group Call to the sender of the messageif the PTT button is pressed when the radio is displaying the alert screen. Reading a Text Message 1 or to Read? and press to select. Selected message in the Inbox opens. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. 2 Do one of the following:

Press to return to the Inbox. Press delete the text message. a second time to reply, forward, or A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. Managing Received Text Messages Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30 messages. Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to the most recently received. 105 English Your radio supports the following options for text messages:

Reply Forward Delete Delete All Note: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or delete all Received messages. Note: Long press Home screen. Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox at any time to return to the 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. or or to Inbox and press to select. toview the messages. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. 5 Do one of the following:

Press press or delete that message. to select the current message, and again to reply, quick reply, forward, Long press screen. to return to the Home Viewing a Telemetry Status Text Message from the Inbox 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. or to Inbox and press to select. or to select. to the required message and press

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 106 English You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text message. The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text Message>. 5 Long press to return to the Home screen. Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. to Messages or to select. and press 2 3 or to Inbox and press to select. or to select. to the required message and press A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. 4 Press once more to access the sub-menu. 5 Do one of the following:

or to Reply and press to select. or select. to Quick Reply and press to A blinking cursor appears. 6 Use your keypad to write/edit your message. 7 once message is composed. Press The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice, If the message cannot be sent,a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice, A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 107 English If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 100). Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. 4 5 6 Radio Controls Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. to Messages or to select. and press or to Inbox and press to select. or to the required message and press to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. 2 3 Press once more to access the sub-menu. or to Delete and press to select. or to Yes and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice and the screen returns to the Inbox. Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages to select. and press 2 or to Inbox and press to select. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 108 English When you select Inbox and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 129). or to Delete All and press to select. or to Yes and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice. 3 4 are listed first. Upon reaching the maximum number of Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automatically replaces the last Job Ticket in your radio. Note:

Job Tickets are retained even after radio is powered down and powered up again. Your radio will automatically detect and discard the duplicated Job Tickets with the same subject line. Accessing the Job Ticket Folder Job Tickets Your radio is able to receive Job Tickets, which are messages from the dispatcher listing out tasks that need to be performed. You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort them into Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are All", "New", "Started", and "Completed". Check with your dealer or system administrator for an additional 10 folders. Your radio supports a maximum of 100 Job Tickets, all of which can be seen in the "All" folder. New Job Tickets and Job Tickets with recent change in state Access the Job Ticket folder. Radio Control Steps Programmed Job Ticket button 2 1 Press the programmed Job Ticket button. or to the required to folder and press select. Note: You can also press and the corresponding number key (19) to access the required folder. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 109 English Radio Control Steps Menu 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Job Tickets and press to select. or to the required to folder and press select. Note: You can also press and the corresponding number key (19) to access the required folder. or to the required Job Ticket and press select. to Responding to the Job Ticket 1 2 to access the menu or to Job Tickets and press to select

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 110 English 3 4 5 6 to the required folder and press or select. You can also press the corresponding number key

(19) to access the required folder. to to the required Job Ticket and press or to select. once more to access the sub-menu. Press You can also press the corresponding number key

(19) to Quick Reply. to the required Job Ticket and press or to select. You can also press the corresponding number key

(19) to respond to the job ticket. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Deleting a Job Ticket Delete a Job Ticket. Radio Control Steps Programmed Job Ticket button 2 1 Press the programmed Job Ticket button. to All and press or to select Menu 1 2 3 4 to access the menu or to Job Tickets and press to select Privacy to All and press or to select or to the required Job Ticket and press select. to Radio Control Steps Note: At Step 4, while viewing the Job Ticket, press 5 6 to delete. Press again while viewing the Job Ticket. to Delete and to select or press Note: You can also press to delete. If enabled, this feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 111 English transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel, the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled) transmissions. Your radio supports two types of privacy:

Basic Privacy Enhanced Privacy. Only ONE of the privacy types above can be assigned to the radio. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Privacy Key (for Basic Privacy), OR the same Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Privacy Key, OR a different Key Value and Key ID, you will either hear a garbled transmission

(Basic Privacy) or nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy). If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the Home screen shows the Secure or Unsecure icon, except when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency call or alarm. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 112 English The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. You can access this feature by Pressing the programmed Privacy button to toggle privacy on or off. Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps described next. Note: Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Privacy and press to select. You can also use option. or to change selected 5 to enable/disable Privacy. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. button and the 2, 5, and 8 Press the numeric keys in tandem. Radio will go back to normal mode. Power cycle the radio via the On/Off button. Covert Mode Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) Your radio is capable of Covert Mode. During covert mode, all keypad and programmed button access are blocked. When enabled, all visual indications (display, LED's and backlight) are enabled. This feature allows audio or tone only via a wired accessory or a Bluetooth accessory. Entering Covert Mode Press the keys in tandem in home screen. button and the 2, 5, and 8 numeric The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature allows the radio to operate in a radio system with an interface to telephone systems. 1 Press and hold the PTT button to initiate a DTMF call. 2 Enter the desired number, * or #. You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all radio tones and alerts (see Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 132). Exiting Covert Mode Multi-Site Controls To exit Covert Mode, do one of the following:

These features are applicable when your current radio channel is part of an IP Site Connect or Linked Capacity Plus configuration. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 113 English See IP Site Connect on page 41 and Linked Capacity Plus on page 42 for more details about these configurations. Starting an Automatic Site Search Note: The radio only scans for a new site if the current signal is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. If the RSSI value is strong, the radio remains on the current site. Description Start Automatic Site search by Radio Control Site Lock On/Off button Radio menu 1 Press the programmed Site Lock On/Off button to toggle the start/stop automatic site search. to access the menu. or press or to Utilities and to select. to Radio Settings 2 3

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A and press to select. 114 English Radio Control Description 4 5 or press or press to Site Roaming and to select. to Site Lock and to select. If the current channel is a multi-site channel with an attached roam list AND is out of range, the radio also performs an automatic site search

(that is the site is unlocked) during a PTT button press or data transmission. A tone sounds and the display shows Site Unlocked. The radio then returns to the Home screen. The display shows the Site Roaming icon and channel alias. The LED blinks yellow rapidly when the radio is actively searching for a new site, and turns off once the radio locks on to a site. Stopping an Automatic Site Search Description When your radio is actively searching for a new site, you can stop the search by Radio Control Site Lock On/Off button Radio menu Press the programmed Site Lock On/Off button to toggle the start/stop automatic site search. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or press or to Utilities and to select. to Radio Settings and press to select. or press to Site Roaming and to select. Radio Control Description 5 or press to Site Lock and to select. A tone sounds and the display shows Site Locked. The radio then returns to the Home screen. The LED turns off and the display shows the channel alias. Starting a Manual Site Search Description Start a Manual Site Search by Radio Control Manual Site Roam button Radio menu 1 to access the menu. Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button to start the manual site search. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 115 English Radio Control Description 2 3 4 5 or press or to Utilities and to select. to Radio Settings and press to select. or press or to Site Roaming and to select. to Active Search and press to select. A tone sounds, the display shows Finding Site, and the LED blinks green. If a new site is found, a tone sounds and the LED turns off. The display shows Site <Alias>

Found. If there is no available site within range, a tone sounds and the LED turns off. The display shows Out of Range. If a new site is within range, but the radio is unable to connect to it, a tone sounds and the LED turns off. The display shows Channel Busy. The radio returns to the Home screen. Security You can enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, you might want to disable a stolen radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable that radio, when it is recovered. Note: Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited to radios with these functions enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Radio Disable 1 Access this feature by Radio Controls Radio Disable button Steps 1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 116 English Radio Controls Steps Radio Controls Steps 2 1 2 Radio menu or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to select. The entries are to Contacts and press alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID select the required alias or ID directly or to the required 4 or to Manual Dial and press to select. or to Radio Number and press select. to The first line of the display shows Radio Number: . the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter the subscriber alias or ID and press

. or to Radio Disable and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. alias or ID and press select. to use the Manual Dial menu The display shows Radio Disable:

<Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. 117 English If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. If not successful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows negative mini notice. Do not press operation as you will not get an acknowledgement message. during the Radio Disable Radio Enable 1 Access this feature by Radio Controls Radio Enable button Radio menu Steps 1 Press the programmed Radio Enable button. 2 1 or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 118 English Radio Controls Steps 2 to Contacts and press or to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID select the required alias or ID directly or to the required alias or ID and press select. to use the Manual Dial menu or to Manual Dial and press to select. or to Radio Number and press select. to Radio Controls Steps The first line of the display shows Radio Number: . the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter the subscriber alias or ID and press

. or press to Radio Enable and to select. 4 The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. If not successful,the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows negative mini notice. Do not press operation as you will not get an acknowledgement message. during the Radio Enable Lone Worker This feature raises an emergency if there is no user activity, such as any radio button press or activation of the channel selector, for a predefined time. Before raising the emergency, when the inactivity timer expires, the radio warns the user via an audio indicator. If there is still no acknowledgment by the user before the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an Emergency Alarm. Only one of the following Emergency Alarms can be assigned to this feature:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow The radio remains in the emergency state allowing voice messages to proceed until action is taken. See A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 119 English Emergency Operation on page 89 on ways to exit Emergency. Note: This feature is limited to radios with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Password Lock Features If enabled, this feature only allows you access your radio if the correct password is entered upon powering up. Accessing the Radio from Password 1 Power up your radio. You hear a continuous tone. 2 Do one of the following:

Enter your current four-digit password with the radios keypad. The second line of the display shows to proceed. Press Enter your current four-digit password. Press or to edit each digits numeric value. Each

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 120 English digit changes to digit. Press

. Press to move to next to confirm your selection. on the to remove the last when the second line of the display is You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit entered. Press display. You hear a negative indicator tone, if you press empty, or if you press more than four digits. If the password is correct, your radio proceeds to power up. See Powering Up the Radio on page 25. If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password. Repeat Steps 1 on page 120 and 2 on page 120. Password less than four digits is incorrect. After the third incorrect password, the display shows Wrong Password and then, shows Radio Locked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow. Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes, and responds to inputs from On/Off Button and programmed Backlight button only. Note:

The radio is unable to receive any call, including emergency calls, in locked state. Unlocking the Radio from Locked State 1 If your radio was powered down after being in the locked state, power up the radio. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow. The display shows Radio Locked. 2 Wait for 15 minutes. Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for locked state when you power up. 3 Repeat Steps 1 on page 210 and 2 on page 210 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 210. Turning the Password Lock On or Off 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 3 4 or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Passwd Lock and press to 5 Enter the four-digit password. See Step 2 on page 210 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 210. 6 to proceed. Press If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the previous menu. 7 If the password entered in the previous step is to enable/disable password correct, press lock. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 121 English Changing the Password 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Passwd Lock and press to 5 Enter the four-digit password. See Step 2 on page 210 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 210. 6 to proceed. Press If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the previous menu. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 122 English 7 If the password entered in the previous step is to Change Pwd and press or correct, to select. 8 Enter a new four-digit password. See Step 2 on page 210 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 210. 9 Reenter the previously entered four-digit password. See Step 2 on page 210 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 210. 10 to proceed. Press If the reentered password matches the new password entered earlier, the display shows Password Changed. If the reentered password does NOT match the new password entered earlier, the display shows Passwords Do Not Match. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Bluetooth Operation This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth enabled device (accessory) via a wireless Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-

Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight.This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound garbled or broken. To correct this problem, simply position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to reestablish clear audio reception. Your radios Bluetooth function has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-

meter/32 feet range. Your radio can support up to 3 simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a scanner, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual for more details on your Bluetooth-

enabled devices full capabilities. Turning Bluetooth On and Off 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to My Status and press to select. The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a

. 4 Do one of the following:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. or to On and press display shows On and a selected status. to select. The appears left of the 123 English or to Off and press display shows Off and a selected status. to select. The appears left of the Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device 6 Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press operation as this cancels the operation. during the finding and connecting 1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-

enabled devices user manual. 2 3 4 On your radio, press to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

or to select. to the required device and press

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 124 English or devices. press to Find Devices to locate available or to the required device and to select. or to Connect and press to select. Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. appears besides If successful, the radio display shows <Device>

Connected. A tone sounds and the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon appears on the status bar. If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting Failed . Note: If pin code is required, use the same entry method as Step 2 on page 210 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 210. Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode) Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the finding and connecting operation as this may cancel the operation. 1 Turn Bluetooth On. See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 123. 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Find Me and press to select. Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-

enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device 1 2 3 4 5 On your radio, press to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. or select. to the required device and press to or to Disconnect and press to select. Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it with your radio. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A positive indicator tone sounds and beside the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon disappears on the status bar. disappears 125 English Switching Audio Route You can toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Radio. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Bluetooth. Viewing Device Details 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. or select. to the required device and press to 5 or select. to View Details and press to Editing Device Name You can edit the name of available Bluetooth-enabled devices. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. or select. to the required device and press to or to Edit Name and press to select. to move one space to the left. Press Press move one space to the right. Press to to delete

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 126 English any unwanted characters. Long press change text entry method. A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type the required zone. to 7 The display shows Device Name Saved. Deleting Device Name You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. or select. to the required device and press to or to Delete and press to select. The display shows Device Deleted. Bluetooth Mic Gain Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled devices microphone gain value. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or select. or values. to BT Mic Gain and press to to the BT Mic Gain type and the current To edit values, press to select. or press to increase or to decrease values and to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. Notification List Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your unread events on the channel, such as unread text messagestelemetry messages and missed calls. 127 English Unread Job Tickets are also stored in the notification list. The Notification icon appears on the status bar when the Notification List has one or more events. For TMS and missed call/call alert notification events, the maximum number are 30 TMS and 10 missed calls/call alerts. This maximum number depends on individual feature (job tickets or TMS or missed calls/

call alerts) list capability. Note: After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification List. Accessing the Notification List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Notification and press to to the required event and press to

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Long press to return to the Home Screen. 128 English Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) Your radio can be updated by your dealer remotely, via OTAP, without needing to be physically connected. Additionally, some settings can also be configured via OTAP. While undergoing OTAP, the LED blinks green. Note: When the radio is receiving high volume data, the High Volume Data icon appears and channel is busy. A PTT button press at this time may cause a negative tone to sound. Once the programming is complete, depending on your radios configuration:

A tone sounds, the display shows Updating Restarting, and your radio restarts (powers off and on again). Select between Restart Now or Postpone. Selecting Postpone allows your radio to return to the previous display, with an OTAP Timer icon visible, for a period of time before the automatic restart occurs. Upon power up after the automatic restart occurs, the display shows Sw Update Completed if the OTAP update is successful or Sw Update Failed if the OTAP update is unsuccessful. See Software Update on page 152 for your updated software version. Utilities Locking and Unlocking the Keypad You can lock your radios keypad to avoid inadvertent key entry. To lock/unlock your radios keypad. Option Locking the Keypad Steps 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or press or to Utilities and to select. to Radio Settings and press to select. or press to Keypad Lock and to select. Option Steps You can also use to change the selected option. or Unlocking the Keypad Press followed by

. After the keypad is locked, the display shows Keypad Locked and returns to the Home screen. After the keypad is unlocked, the display shows Keypad Unlocked and returns to the Home screen. Turning Keypad Tones On or Off You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to 129 English 4 5 6 or select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to to Keypad Tones and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable keypad tones. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off A channel can support up to 6 option board features. Refer to your dealer or system administrator for more information. Press the programmed Option Board Feature button to toggle the feature on or off. Identifying Cable Type You can select the type of cable your radio uses. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 130 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Cable Type and press to select. At Step 4, you can also use selected option. or to change the 5 The current cable type is indicated by a Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) Feature On or Off This feature allows you to initiate a hands-free voice activated call on a programmed channel. The radio automatically transmits, for a programmed period, whenever the microphone on the VOX-capable accessory detects voice. Pressing the PTT button during radio operation will disable VOX. To re-enable VOX, do one of the following:

English Turn the radio off and power it on again Press the programmed VOX button to toggle the feature on or off or follow the steps described next to access this feature via the radio menu. Note: Turning this feature on or off is limited to radios with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to VOX and press to select. to disable/enable VOX. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Controlling the Display Backlight You can enable or disable the radios display backlight as needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly. Press the programmed Backlight button to toggle the backlight settings, or follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. The display backlight and keypad backlighting are automatically turned off if the LED indicator is disabled (see Turning the LED Indicator On or Off on page 138). 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Backlight and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 131 English You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable the display backlight. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. 4 5 6 Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts

(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if needed. Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to or to All Tones and press to select. to enable/disable all tones and alerts. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/

alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to 5 1 2 3

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 132 English 4 5 6 or select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to to Vol. Offset and press to or to the required volume value. The radio sounds a feedback tone with each corresponding volume value. 7 Do one of the following:

Press volume value. to keep the required displayed Press current volume offset settings. to exit without changing the Repeat Step 6 on page 133 to select another volume value. Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if needed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to to Talk Permit and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. to enable/disable the Talk Permit Tone. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. 133 English Setting the Text Message Alert Tone Changing the Display Mode You can customize your radios text message alert tone to Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in the Contacts list. You can change radios display mode between Day or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of the display. to access the menu. or or to Contacts and press to select. to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. to Message Alert and press or select. The display shows Momentary and Repetitive. to You can also use option. or to change the selected or enable to the required setting and press to appears besides selected setting. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 1 2 3 4 5 134 English Change the Display Mode Radio Control Steps Programmed Display Mode Button Menu Press the programmed Display Mode button. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or press or to Utilities and to select. to Radio to Settings and press select. or press to Display and to select. Radio Control Steps The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. Note: You can also use to change the selected or option. or 5 to the required setting and press enable. selected setting. appears besides to Adjusting the Display Brightness You can adjust radios display brightness as needed. Note: Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto Brightness is enabled. Adjust the Display Brightness Radio Control Steps Programmed Display 1 Press the programmed Brightness button. Radio Control Steps Brightness Button 2 Decrease display brightness by pressing or increase the display brightness by pressing

. Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press confirm your entry. to Menu 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or press or to Utilities and to select. to Radio Settings and press select. or to Brightness to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. to select. and press The display shows a progress bar. 135 English Radio Control Steps 5 5 Decrease display brightness by pressing or increase the display brightness by pressing

. Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press confirm your entry. to Wallpaper Mode Your radio displays the Wallpaper background on home screen. The user can select from 5 default wallpapers. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Display and press to select. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 136 English or to Wallpaper and press to select. You can also use option. or to change the selected Screen Saver Mode The screen saver feature allows the radio to save radio battery time. A Screen Saver Pre Duration is used to track the radio activities before entering screen saver mode. Radio starts Screen Saver Pre Duration upon power up. Radio enters into screen saver mode when Screen Saver Pre Duration timer expires, the radio exits screen saver mode and responds to related transaction normally upon any user input and over the air transaction. Radio restarts Screen Saver Pre Duration upon any user input and over the air transaction. After being in Screen Saver mode for 5 seconds, radio enters keypad lock state automatically. When any audio or Bluetooth accessory is connected, battery saver mode is enabled, radio enters screen saver mode. If there is any user input or over the air transaction, the radio exits screen saver mode and responds to user interaction. The Screen Saver Pre Duration is restarted and the radio goes back to screen saver mode when it expires. Note: The screen saver mode is to help improve battery life. Audio Accessory The audio accessory has two modes: Normal and Battery Saver mode. When audio accessory is plugged in and the setting is in Battery Saver Mode, the radio restarts the timer and goes into screen saver mode. In this scenario, when there is any user input (including user input on radio and accessory attachment/detachment) or when receiving emergency alarm/call, the radio exits screen saver mode and responds to user event as normal. The Screen Saver timer restarts and the radio goes back to screen saver mode when the time allocated expires. Note: This battery saver mode is to improve battery life. See Screen Saver box SRS for more details in this mode. Auto Keypad Lock You can enable/disable your radios auto keypad lock to avoid inadvertent key entry. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Auto Keypad Lock and press to 5 Do one of the following:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. Press display shows to enable Auto Keypad Lock. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Auto Keypad Lock. The 137 English Language You can set your radio display to be in your required language. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Languages and press to select. or to enable. to the required language and press appears beside selected language. Turning the LED Indicator On or Off You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if needed. 1 to access the menu. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 138 English 2 3 4 5 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to LED Indicator and press to to enable/disable the LED Indicator. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current Zone or Channel the user has just assigned, or programmable button press. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. Toggle Voice Announcement On or Off. Radio Control Programmed Voice Announcement Button Menu Steps Press the programmed Voice Announcement button. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. to Utilities or to select. and press or to Radio Settings and press select. or to Voice Announcement and press to select. Note: You can also use or selected option. to change the 5 Do one of the following:

Radio Control Steps to enable Press Voice Announcement. The display shows beside Enabled. to disable Press Voice Announcement. The disappears from beside Enabled. to Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D) This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 139 English 3 4 or select. to Radio Settings and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected or to Mic AGC-D and press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Mic AGC-D. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Mic AGC-D. The Intelligent Audio Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume to overcome background noise in the environment, inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and does not affect Transmit audio. Note: This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 140 English Toggle Intelligent Audio On or Off. Radio Control Steps Programmed Intelligent Audio Button Menu Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Radio Settings and press select. or to Radio Settings and press select. or to Intelligent to to Audio and press select. to Note: You can also use to change the selected or option. 5 Do one of the following:

Radio Control Steps Press to enable Intelligent Audio. The display shows Enabled. beside to disable Press Intelligent Audio. The disappears from beside Enabled. See Accessories on page 245 for recommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessories with in-built Automatic Volume Control for similar performance. Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. Toggle Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Features On or Off Radio Control Steps Programmed Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Button Menu Press the programmed Acoustic Feedback Suppressor button. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or press or to Utilities and to select. to Radio Settings and press select. or to AF to Suppressor and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. Note: You can also use to change the selected or option. 5 Do one of the following:

141 English Radio Control Steps Press to enable Acoustic Feedback Suppressor. The display shows beside Enabled. to disable Press Acoustic Feedback Suppressor. The disappears from beside Enabled. Text Entry Configuration You can configure the following settings for entering text on your radio:

Word Predict Word Correct Sentence Cap My Words Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

Numbers Symbols

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 142 English Predictive or Multi-Tap Language (If programmed) to return to the at any time to return to the Note: Press previous screen or long press Home Screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Word Predict Your radio can learn common word sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the next word you may want to use after you enter the first word of a common word sequence into the text editor. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Text Entry and press to select. 5 or select. to Word Predict and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected 6 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Word Predict. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Word Predict. The Word Correct Supplies alternative word choices when the word entered into the text editor is not recognized by the in-

built dictionary. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 3 4 5 or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Text Entry and press to select. or select. to Word Correct and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected 6 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Word Correct. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Word Correct. The Sentence Cap Automatically enables capitalization for the first letter in the first word for every new sentence. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 1 to access the menu. 143 English 2 3 4 5 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Text Entry and press to select. or select. to Sentence Cap and press to 6 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Sentence Cap. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Sentence Cap. The Viewing Custom Words You can add your own custom words into your radios in-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list to contain these words. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 144 English 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Text Entry and press to select. or to My Words and press to select. to List of Words and press or select. Display shows the list of custom words. to Editing Custom Word You can edit the custom words saved in your radio. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to method. Press completed. once your custom word is 3 4 5 6 7 8 or to Text Entry and press to select. or to My Words and press to select. to List of Words and press or select. Display shows the list of custom words. to or select. to the required word and press to or to Edit and press to select. 9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press or A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Adding Custom Word You can add your own custom words into your radios in-built dictionary. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Text Entry and press to select. to change text entry 145 English 5 6 or to My Words and press to select. to Add New Word and press or select. Display shows the list of custom words. to 7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted or Press the Press the characters. Long press method. Press completed. to change text entry once your custom word is The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 146 English Deleting a Custom Word You can delete the custom words saved in your radio. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Text Entry and press to select. or to My Words and press to select. or select. to the required word and press to or to Delete and press to select. 8 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes. or to No and press to return to the previous screen. Deleting All Custom Words You can delete all custom words from your radios in-

built. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Text Entry and press to select. or to My Words and press to select. or to Delete All and press to select. 7 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes. or to No and press to return to the previous screen. Flexible Receive List Flexible Receive List is a digital-only (currently supported in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus) feature that allows you to add, delete or edit members on the receive talkgroup list. Your radio can support a maximum of 16 members in the list. Turning the Flexible Receive List On or Off You can enable and disable the Flexible Receive List if needed. Enable the Flexible Receive List Radio Control Steps Programmed Flexible Receive List Button Press the programmed Flexible Receive List button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 147 English Radio Control Steps Menu 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities to select. and press or to Radio Settings and press select. or to Flexible Rx to List and press select. to Press the Flexible Rx List. to enable/disable Previous display Current display Turn On Flexible Rx List On Turn Off Flexible Rx List Off Adding a New Entry to the Flexible Receive List 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Flexible Rx List and press to to View/Edit List and press to or to Add Member and press to select. 7 Select the required alias or ID by Radio Control Radio Navigation Buttons Steps or to the required alias or ID. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 148 English Radio Control Keypad Steps Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. to move one space to the to move one space to Press left. Press the right. Press the key to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method. The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the short listed search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the list. 8 9 Press The display shows Add Another?. to select. or to No and press to select The display shows

. Deleting an Entry from the Flexible Receive List 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Flexible Rx List and press to to View/Edit List and press to 6 Select the required alias or ID by A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 149 English Radio Control Radio Navigation Buttons Keypad Steps or to the required alias or ID. Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. to move one space to the to move one space to Press left. Press the right. Press the key to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method. The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the short listed search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with

. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 150 English Radio Control Steps the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the list. Press to select. or to Delete and press to select. or to Yes and press to select. The display shows

. 7 8 9 Accessing General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:

Battery Radio Alias and ID Firmware and Codeplug Versions Open-Source Software Information Software Update Site Information at any time to return to the previous to return to the Home Press screen or long press screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Accessing the Battery Information Displays information on your radio battery. Checking the Radio Alias and ID This feature displays the ID of your radio. Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to check your radio alias and ID. You hear a positive indicator tone. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio screen. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. to to Battery Info and press or select. The display shows the battery information. For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display reads Recondition Battery if the battery requires reconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After the reconditioning process, the display then shows the battery information. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. or to My ID and press to select. The first line of the display shows the radio alias. The second line of the display shows the radio ID. Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version Displays the firmware version on your radio. 151 English A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. or to Versions and press to select. The display shows the current firmware and codeplug versions. Checking the Open-Source Software Information Displays the open-source software (OSS) information on your radio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. or to Versions and press to select. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 152 English The display shows the Firmware Version information. Software Update Displays the date and time of the latest software update carried out via Over-the-Air Programming. Note: Software Update menu is only available after at least one successful OTAP session. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. or to SW Update and press to select. The display shows the date and time of the latest software update. See Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) on page 128 for details on OTAP session. Site Information Displays the current Linked Capacity Plus site name your radio is on. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. or to Site Info and press to select. The display shows the current Linked Capacity Plus site name. See Linked Capacity Plus on page 42 for details on Linked Capacity Plus. RSSI Values Your radio shows the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) icon at the top of your display. This feature allows you to view the RSSI values. three times and On the home screen, press immediately press The display shows current RSSI values. Long to return to the Home Screen. press the

, all within 5 seconds. See Display Icons on page 34 for details on RSSI icon. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t

. 153 English Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button The PTT button on the side of the radio (

two basic purposes:

) serves

. t c e n n o C n i s l o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 154 English The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call on page 165). If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page 133) is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. Programmable Buttons Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the duration of a button press:

Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Long press Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. Hold down Keeping the button pressed. Note: The programmed duration of a button press is applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or settings. See Emergency Operation on page 185 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. A Assignable Radio Functions Actions A programmable button to access a CPS programmable action list. Bluetooth Audio Switch Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Busy Queue Cancellation Exits the busy mode when a non-Emergency call in the Busy Queue was initiated. Emergency calls, once accepted into the Busy Queue, cannot be cancelled. Contacts Provides direct access to the Contacts list. Voice Announcement for Channel Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. This function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled. Emergency On/Off Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Manual Dial Depending on the programming, initiates a Private Call by keying in any subscriber ID. One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Private Call, a Call Alert or a Quick Text message. Privacy Toggles privacy on or off. Radio Check Determines if a radio is active in a system. Radio Enable Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled. Radio Disable Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled. Remote Monitor Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Roam Request Requests to search for a different site. Scan Toggles scan on or off. Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Text Message Selects the text message menu. Zone Allows selection from a list of zones. Assignable Settings or Utility Functions All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o l s i n C o n n e c t

. 155 English Backlight Toggles display backlight on or off. Brightness Allows brightness to be set via the manual brightness mode or auto brightness control via the radios photo sensor. Display Mode Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. Keypad Lock Toggles keypad between locked and unlocked. Power Level Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Wallpaper Displayed on home screen. Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus Mode Display Icons Your radio has a 2 inch landscape display with QVGA

(Quarter Video Graphics Array) 16-bit color resolution. The following are icons that appear on the radios display. Icons are displayed arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed represents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving. Bluetooth Not Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device connected. Bluetooth Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is connected. Bluetooth Discoverable The Bluetooth feature is enabled and radio is in discoverable mode. Notification List has items to review. t c e n n o C n i s l o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 156 English Option Board The Option Board is enabled. (Option board enabled models only) Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. Scan Scan feature is enabled. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. Secure The Privacy feature is enabled. Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled. Site Roaming The site roaming feature is enabled. Battery The number of bars (0 4) shown indicates the charge remaining in the battery. Blinks when the battery is low. Battery Discharging Status Shows battery discharging status. All Tones Disabled No ring tones available. Call Log Radio call log. Contact Radio contact is available. Message Incoming message. Silent Ring Silent ring mode is enabled. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o l s i n C o n n e c t

. 157 English Ring Only Ringing mode is enabled. Vibrate Vibrate mode is enabled. Vibrate and Ring Vibrate and Ring mode is enabled. Keypad Keypad locked. Call Icons The following icons appear on the radios display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate ID type. Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. Group Call/All Call Indicates a Group Call or All Call in progress. Sent Item Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner of the radios display in the Sent Items folder. Sent Successfully The text message is sent successfully. Individual or Group Message Read The text message has been read. Individual or Group Message Unread The text message has not been read. OR OR OR

. t c e n n o C n i s l o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 158 English Send Failed The text message has not been sent. OR LED Indicator The LED indicator (

) shows the operational status of your radio. Blinking red Radio is transmitting at low battery condition, receiving an emergency transmission or has failed the self-

test upon powering up. Radio is receiving over-the-air file transfer (Option Board firmware file, Rapidly blinking red Network Frequency file or Option Board Codeplug file) or upgrading to a new Option Board firmware file. Radio is receiving a Call Alert, received a text message or Scan is enabled and is receiving activity. Blinking green and yellow Solid yellow Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Also indicates fair battery charge when programmable button is pressed. Radio is actively searching for a new site. Double blinking yellow Blinking yellow Blinking green Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting. Radio is receiving a Call Alert or Scan is enabled and is idle (not unmuted to any activity) Also indicates full charge of the battery when the programmable button is pressed. Radio is powering up, receiving a non-privacy- enabled call or data. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o l s i n C o n n e c t

. 159 English A Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. High pitched tone Periodic Tone Rapidly blinking green Note:

Indicator Tones High pitched tone Low pitched tone Repetitive Tone Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone Momentary Tone Low pitched tone Sounds periodically depending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user. Sounds only once for a short period of time defined by the radio. Audio Tones Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the radios status or the radios response to data received. High pitched tone Continuous Tone Low pitched tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination. t c e n n o C n i s l o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 160 English Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode Selecting a Site A site provides coverage for a specific area. A Connect Plus site has a site controller and a maximum of 15 repeaters. In a multi-site network, the Connect Plus radio will automatically search for a new site when the signal level from the current site drops to an unacceptable level. Roam Request A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable. Note: This is programmed by your dealer. Press the programmed Roam Request button. You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site Number>. Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. The display shows Site Locked. You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. The display shows Site Unlocked. Site Restriction i M a k n g a n d R e c e i v i n g C a l l s i Your Connect Plus radio system administrator has the ability to decide which network sites your radio is and is not allowed to use. Your radio does not need to be reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a disallowed site, you see a brief message stating:

Site <number given> Not Allowed. The radio then searches for a different network site. n C o n n e c t

. 161 English Selecting a Zone The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16 Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions on the Channel Selector Knob. Each assignable knob position can be used to start one of the following voice call types:

Group Call Multigroup Call All Call Private Call 1 Access the Zone feature. Radio Controls Programmed Zone button Radio menu Steps Press the programmed Zone button. 1 2 to access the menu. or press to Zone and to select. t c e n n o C n i s l l a C g n i v i e c e R d n a g n k a M i 162 English The current zone is displayed and indicated by a

. 2 Select the required zone. Radio Control Steps or or and scroll to the required zone. 3 to select. Press The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. Using Multiple Networks If your radio has been programmed to use multiple Connect Plus networks, you can select a different network by switching to the Connect Plus zone that is assigned to the desired network. These network-to-

zone assignments are configured by your dealer through radio programming. Selecting a Call Type Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Use the 4Way Navigation Disc to select a call type. This can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, All Call or Private Call, depending on how your radio is programmed. If you navigate with the 4Way Navigation Disc to a different Call Type this causes the radio to re-register with the Connect Plus site. The radio registers with the Registration Group ID that has been programmed for the newChannel Selector Knob position call type. If you select a position that has no call type assigned to it, your radio sounds a continuous tone and the display shows Unprogrammed. Your radio does not operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel, use the 4Way Navigation Disc to select a programmed channel instead. Once the required zone is displayed (if you have multiple zones in your radio), use the 4Way Navigation Disc to select the call type. Once the channel, subscriber ID or call type is displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. Note: The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call . To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID

(programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). Note: See Privacy on page 206 for more information. Receiving and Responding to a Group Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home screen), the LED blinks green. The first line of the display shows the caller alias, and the RSSI icon. The second line displays the group alias and the Group i M a k n g a n d R e c e i v i n g C a l l s i n C o n n e c t

. 163 English Call icon (in Digital mode only). Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to stop the current call from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to talk/respond. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Note: See Making a Group Call on page 166 for details on making a Group Call. Note: If the radio receives a Group Call while not on the Home screen, it remains on its current screen prior to answering the call. t c e n n o C n i s l l a C g n i v i e c e R d n a g n k a M i 164 English Note: Long press the screen to view the caller alias before replying. button to go to the Home Receiving and Responding to a Private Call A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks green. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line displays Private Call and the Private Call icon. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. See Making a Private Call on page 166 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving an All Call An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the site. It is used to make important announcements requiring the users full attention. When you receive an All Call, a tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The first line of the display shows the caller alias, and the RSSI icon. The second line displays All Call and the All Call icon. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker. Once the All Call ends, the radio returns to the previous screen before receiving the call. An All Call does not wait for a predetermined period of time before ending. You cannot respond to an All Call. Note: See Making an All Call on page 167 for details on making an All Call. Note: The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. During an All Call, you will not be able to use any programmed button functions until the call ends. Making a Radio Call After selecting your channel, you can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:

The PTT button. A programmed One Touch Access button The One Touch Access feature allows you to make a Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page 177). Note: Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission. Only target radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. Note: See Privacy on page 206 for more information. i M a k n g a n d R e c e i v i n g C a l l s i n C o n n e c t

. 165 English Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob Making a Group Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. 1 Select the channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 163. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the group call alias. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radios speaker. You see the Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID on your display. t c e n n o C n i s l l a C g n i v i e c e R d n a g n k a M i 166 English If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Making a Private Call While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you make a Private Call via the Contacts list, Call Log, One Touch Access button, or the Channel Selector Knob, if this feature is not enabled. Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to contact an individual radio. See Text Message Features on page 191 or Call Alert Operation on page 87 for more information. 1 Do one of the following. Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 163. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. If you release the PTT button while the radio is setting up the call, it exits without any indication and returns to the previous screen. The LED lights up solid green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radios speaker. The Private Call icon appears on the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status.. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radio's speaker. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see negative mini notice on the display. Making an All Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the site that are currently not engaged in another call. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Users on the channel/site cannot respond to an All Call. 1 Select the channel with the active All Call group alias. See Selecting a Call Type on page 163. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green.The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows All Call. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. i M a k n g a n d R e c e i v i n g C a l l s i n C o n n e c t

. 167 English Making a Multi-group Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on multiple groups. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Note: Users on the groups cannot respond to a Multi-

group Call. 1 Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the Multi-group alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Multi-group alias or ID. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button Note: Programmable buttons press must be initiated from the Home screen. The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button

. t c e n n o C n i s l l a C g n i v i e c e R d n a g n k a M i 168 English Making a Private Call 1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. The display shows Number:. 2 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias or Private ID. 3 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. i M a k n g a n d R e c e i v i n g C a l l s i n C o n n e c t

. 169 English Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode Auto Fallback Auto Fallback is a system feature that allows you to continue to make and receive non-emergency calls on the selected Group Contact in the event of certain types of Connect Plus system failures. If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts to roam to a different Connect Plus site. This search process may result in your radio finding an operable Connect Plus site, or it may result in your radio finding a Fallback Channel (if your radio is enabled for Auto Fallback). A Fallback Channel is a repeater that is normally part of an operable Connect Plus site, but is currently unable to communicate with either its site controller or the Connect Plus network. In Fallback mode, the repeater operates as a stand-alone digital repeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports non-

emergency Group Calls only. No other call types are supported in Fallback Mode. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 170 English Indications of Auto Fallback Mode When your radio is using a Fallback channel, you hear the intermittent Fallback Tone approximately once every 15 seconds (except while transmitting). The display periodically shows a brief message, Fallback Channel. Your radio only permits PTT on the selected Group Contact (Group Call, Multigroup Call, or Site All Call). It does not allow you to make other types of calls. Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode Note:

Calls are heard only by radios that are monitoring the same Fallback channel and selected to the same Group. Calls are not networked to other sites or other repeaters. Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alerts are not available in Fallback mode. If you press the emergency button in Fallback mode, the radio provides an invalid key press tone. Display-equipped radios also show the message, Feature not available. Private (radio to radio) calls are not available in Fallback mode. If you attempt a call to a private contact, you will receive a denial tone. At this point you should select a desired group contact. Other non-

supported calls include Remote Monitor, Call Alert, Radio Check, Radio Enable, Radio Disable, Text messaging, Location Updates, and packet data calls. Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is not supported in Auto Fallback mode. If two or more radio users press PTT at the same time (or at almost the same time), it is possible that both radios transmit until PTT is released. In this event, it is possible that none of the transmissions will be understood by receiving radios. Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normal functioning. Simply select the group contact you wish to use (using the radios normal channel selection method), and then press the PTT to start your call. It is possible that the channel may be in use already by another group. If the channel is in use, you receive a busy tone and the display will say Channel Busy. You may select Group, Multi-group or Site All Call contacts using your radios normal channel selection method. While the radio is operating on the Fallback Channel, the Multigroup operates just like other Groups. It is only heard by radios that are currently selected to the same Multi-group. Enhanced Privacy is supported in Fallback mode. Returning to Normal Operation If the site returns to normal trunking operation while you are in range of your Fallback repeater, your radio automatically exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear a registration beep when the radio successfully registers. If you are in the range of an operable site

(that is not in Fallback mode), you may press the Roam Request button (if programmed for your radio) to force your radio to search for and register on an available site. If no other site is available, your radio returns to Auto Fallback mode after searching is complete. If you drive out of coverage of your Fallback repeater, your radio enters Search mode

(display indicates Searching). Radio Check If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. Sending a Radio Check 1 Access the Radio Check feature. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 171 English Radio Control Steps Programmed Radio Check button 2 1 Press the programmed Radio Check button. or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. Menu 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or press or to Contacts and to select. to the required subscriber alias or ID and press or to select. to Radio Check and press to select. If the target radio is active in the system, a tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio Available. If the target radio is not active in the system, a tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio Not Available. Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. Remote Monitor Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs only). No audible or visual indication is given to the target radio. You can use this feature to monitor, remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Initiating Remote Monitor The display shows the Target Alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. Note: Remote Monitor automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 172 2 Wait for acknowledgement. English 1 Access the Remote Monitor feature. Radio Control Steps Programmed Remote Monitor Button 2 1 Press the programmed or Remote Monitor button. to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. Menu 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or press or to Contacts and to select. to the required subscriber alias or ID and press or to select. to Manual Dial and press to select. or to Remote Mon. and press to select. The display shows the Target Alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows Rem. Monitor Successful. Your radio starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration and display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone the display shows Rem. Monitor Failed. Scan This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls for groups/channels defined in a pre-programmed scan list. When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on the status bar and the LED blinks green and yellow. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. Starting and Stopping Scan Note: This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all Connect Plus zones with the same Network 173 English ID as your currently selected zone. It is important to note that even when the Scan feature is turned on via this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some

(or all) groups on your scan list. See Editing the Scan List on page 175 for more information. You can start and stop scanning by pressing the programmed Scan button OR follow the procedure described next. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or to Turn On or Turn Off and press to select. The display shows Scan On if scan is disabled. The display shows Scan Off if scan is enabled. Responding to a Transmission During a Scan During scanning, your radio stops on a channel/group where activity is detected. The radio stays on that channel for a programmed time period known as hang time. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 174 English 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button during hang time. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio returns to scanning other groups. User Configurable Scan If the Edit List menu is enabled, a user is able to Add and Remove the scan members from the Add Member menu. A Scan List member must be a regular Group Contact (i.e. not Multi-group or Site All Call/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID as the currently selected Zone. The Talkgroup's Alias must also not match any Talkgroup that is already included in the current Zone's Scan List. Scan can be turned on or off from the menu or by pressing a programmed Scan On/Off button. This feature functions only when the radio is not currently involved in a call. If you are presently listening to a call, your radio cannot scan for other group calls, and is therefore unaware they are in progress. Once your call is finished, your radio returns to the control channel time slot and is able to scan for groups that are in the scan list. Turning Scan On or Off Note: This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all zones with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone. It is important to note that even when the Scan feature is turned on via this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some (or all) groups on your scan list. See the next section for more information. If Scan is turned on, the Scan icon appears on your display. When Scan is on and you are not participating in a call, the LED blinks green and yellow. The procedure for turning Scan on or off depends on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a Scan On/Off button, use the button to toggle the feature on or off. If your radio has been programmed so that Scan can be turned on or off via the menu, follow the procedure described next. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or to Turn On or Turn Off and press to select. The display shows Scan On momentarily if scan is disabled. The display shows Scan Off momentarily if scan is enabled. Editing the Scan List Note: If the scan list entry happens to be the radios currently selected group, the radio listens for activity on this group regardless of whether the list entry currently shows a check mark or not. Whenever a radio is not in a call, the radio listens for activity on its Selected Group, Multigroup, the Site All Call, and its Default Emergency Revert Group (if configured for one). This operation cannot be disabled. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 175 English Your scan list determines which groups can be scanned. The list is created when your radio is programmed. If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can selectively enable/disable scan for individual groups on the list. However, you cannot delete groups from the list or add groups to the list. This can only be done through radio programming. s u P l to access the menu. or select. to View/Edit List and press to The display shows Disable if scan is currently enabled for the Group. 5 Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable) to select. and press Depending on which option was selected, the radio momentarily displays Scan Enabled or Scan Disabled as confirmation. The radio displays the Zone scan list again. If scan was enabled for the Group, the check mark displays before the Group name. If scan was disabled for the Group, the check mark is removed before the Group name. or to the desired Group name. Understanding Scan Operation If a check mark precedes the Group name, then scan is currently enabled for this Group. If there is no check mark preceding the Group name, then scan is currently disabled for this Group. to select the desired Group. The display shows Enable if scan is currently disabled for the Group. Note: If you scan into a call for a group that is not assigned to a channel position in your currently selected zone and you miss the calls Hang Time, you have to switch to the proper zone and then select the groups channel position to talk back to that group. There are some circumstances in which you can miss calls for groups that are in your scan list. When you miss a call for one of the following reasons, this does not indicate a problem with your radio. This is a normal scan operation for Connect Plus. t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 1 2 3 4 176 English Scan feature is not turned on (check for the scan icon on the display). Scan list member has been disabled via the menu

(see Editing the Scan List on page 175). You are participating in a call already. No member of the scanned group is registered at your site (Multisite systems only). Contacts Settings Note:

You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for Digital Contacts. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be performed by your dealer. If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make a privacy-enabled voice call on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key OR the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio are able to unscramble the transmission. Contacts provide address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. Each zone provides a Contact List with up to 100 contacts. The following contact types are available:

Private Call Group Call Multigroup Call All Call Voice All Call Text Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server. Making a Private Call from Contacts 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:

select the subscriber alias or ID directly or to the required subscriber alias or A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. ID and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu 177 English or select. to Manual Dial and press to If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID. Press select. to 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green and the display shows the transmitting user's ID. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Making a Call Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Key in the first character of the required alias, and to locate the required alias. then press or 4 Use the keypad to type the required alias. to move one space to the left. Press Press move one space to the right. Press the to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to key to change text entry method. 5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 Press the PTT button to make the call. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 178 English The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the destination alias. 7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 8 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. Adding a New Contact 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. 3 or select. to New Contact and press to 4 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and press to confirm. 5 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and press to confirm. 6 If adding a Radio Contact, or required ringer type and press The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved. to the to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t Call Indicator Settings Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Call Alert. l P u s

. 1 to access the menu. 179 English or to Utilities and press to select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alert and press to to Call Ringers and press to or select. or select. or select. or to Call Alert and press

. The current tone is indicated by a to select. or select. to the required tone and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected appears beside selected tone. Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Private Call. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to to Call Ringers and press to to Private Call and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected 2 3 4 5 6 7

. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 180 English to enable/disable the Private Call 7 Press ringing tones. The display shows Call ringing tones are enabled. The Call ringing tones are disabled. disappears from beside Enabled, if Private beside Enabled, if Private Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Text Message. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to 5 6 7 or select. to Call Ringers and press to to Text Message and press or select. The current tone is indicated by a

. to or select. to the required tone and press to appears beside selected tone. Assigning Ring Styles You can program your radio to sound one of ten predefined ringing tones when receiving a Call Alert or a Text Message from a particular contact. The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through the list. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 181 English 3 4 5 6 7 to the required alias or ID and press or to select. or to View/Edit and press to select. or to Ringer and press to select. or select. A to required ring style and press to indicates the current selected tone. or select. The display shows Contact Saved. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. to Escalating Alarm Tone Volume You can program your radio to continually alert you when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 1 to access the menu. 182 English 2 3 4 5 6 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to or to Escalert and press to select. You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable the Escalert. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Call Log Features Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log feature to view and manage recent calls. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:

Delete View Details Viewing Recent Calls The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Call Log and press to select. or to preferred list and press to select. The display shows the most recent entry at the top of the list. or to view the list. Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with the current selected alias or ID. Deleting a Call from a Call List 1 to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 or to Call Log and press to select. to to the required list and press or select. When you select a call list and it contains no entries, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 129). to the required alias or ID and press or to select. or select. to Delete Entry? and press to 6 Do one of the following:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. Press display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes to delete the entry. The or to No, and press the return to the previous screen. button to 183 English Viewing Details from a Call List Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Call Log and press to select. or select. to the required list and press to to the required alias or ID and press or to select. to View Details and press or select. Display shows details. to Call Alert Operation When you receive a Call Alert page, you see the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio on the display. When you hear a repetitive tone and the LED blinks yellow and green, do one of the following:

Press the PTT button while the display still shows the Call Alert in the Notification List to respond with a Private Call. Press alert is moved to the Missed Call Log. to exit the Notification List. The See Notification List on page 217 for details about the Notification List. See Call Log Features on page 182 for details about the Missed Call List. Making a Call Alert from the Contact List Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only and is accessible through the menu via Contacts or manual dial. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 184 English 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:

select the subscriber alias or ID directly or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu or select. to Manual Dial and press to The first line of the display shows Radio Number: , the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the subscriber ID you want to page and press

. 4 or to Call Alert and press to select. The display shows Call Alert: <Subscriber Alias or ID>Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows Call Alert Successful. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows Call Alert Failed. Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias or ID. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows Call Alert Successful. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows Call Alert Failed. Emergency Operation A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. Note:

If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent with voice emergency initiation, in most cases it 185 English automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call or Emergency Alert is finished. The exception to this rule is when Emergency Alert is the configured Emergency Mode and Silent is the configured Emergency Type. If your radio is programmed in this manner, the silent operation continues until you cancel silent operation by pressing PTT or the button configured for Emergency Off. Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alerts are not supported when operating in Connect Plus Auto Fallback mode. For more information see the Auto Fallback on page 170. An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a critical situation. You can initiate an Emergency at any time on any screen display, even when there is activity on the current channel. Pressing the Emergency button initiates the programmed Emergency mode. The programmed Emergency mode may also be initiated by triggering the optional Man Down feature. The Emergency feature may be disabled in your radio. Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:

. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 186 English Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. If short Emergency button short press is assigned to Emergency On, then Emergency button long press is assigned to Emergency Off. If Emergency button short press is assigned to Emergency On, then Emergency button short press is assigned to Emergency Off. When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone, it supports three Emergency modes:

Emergency Call You must press the PTT button to talk on the assigned emergency time slot. Emergency Call with Voice to Follow For the first transmission on the assigned emergency time slot, the microphone is automatically unmuted and you may talk without pressing the PTT button. The microphone stays hot in this fashion for a time period programmed into the radio. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. Emergency Alert An Emergency Alert is not a voice call. It is an emergency notification that is sent to radios that are configured to receive these alerts. The radio sends an emergency alert via the control channel of the currently registered site. The Emergency Alert is received by radios in the Connect Plus network that are programmed to receive them (no matter which network site they are registered to). Only ONE of the Emergency Modes can be assigned to the Emergency button per zone. In addition, each Emergency mode has the following types:

Regular Radio initiates an Emergency and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Silent Radio initiates an Emergency without any audio or visual indicators. The radio will suppress all audio or visual indications of the Emergency until you press the PTT button to start a voice transmission. Silent with Voice The same as Silent operation, except that the radio will also unmute for some voice transmissions. Receiving an Incoming Emergency Your radio may be programmed to sound an alert tone and also display information about the incoming Emergency. If so programmed, upon receiving the incoming Emergency, the display shows the Emergency Details screen with the emergency icon, the Alias or ID of the radio that requested the Emergency, the Group Contact being used for the Emergency, and one additional line of information. The additional information is the name of the zone that contains the Group Contact. At the present time, the radio displays only the most recently decoded Emergency. If a new Emergency is received before the prior Emergency is cleared, the details for the new Emergency replace the details of the previous Emergency. Depending on how your radio has been programmed, the Emergency Details screen (or Alarm List screen) will stay on your radios display even after the Emergency ends. You can save the emergency details to the Alarm List, or you can delete the emergency details as described in the following sections. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 187 English Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List Saving the emergency details to the Alarm List allows you to view the details again at a later time by selecting Alarm List from the Main Menu. While the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen is displayed, press The Exit Alarm List screen displays. Do one of the following. Select Yes and press emergency details to the Alarm List, and to exit the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen. to save the Select No and press Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen. to return to the Deleting the Emergency Details While the Emergency Details screen is displayed, press The Delete screen displays. Do one of the following. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 188 English Select Yes and press emergency details. to delete the Select No and press Emergency Details screen. to return to the Responding to an Emergency Call Note: If you do not respond to the Emergency Call within the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time, the Emergency call will end. If you want to speak to the group after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires, you must first select the channel position assigned to the group (if not already selected). Then, press PTT to start a non-Emergency Call to the group. 1 When receiving an Emergency Call, press any button to stop all Emergency Call received indications. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. All radios that are monitoring this group hear your transmission. proper response is determined by your organization and the individual situation. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. The LED lights up green. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds, the LED blinks green, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radio's speaker.You see the Group Call icon, the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your display. Responding to an Emergency Alert Note: The Group contact used for the Emergency Alert should not be used for voice communication. This could prevent other radios from sending and receiving Emergency Alerts on the same group. An Emergency Alert from a radio indicates that the user is in an urgent situation. You may respond to the alert by initiating a private call to the radio who declared the emergency, initiating a group call to a designated talk group, sending the radio a Call Alert, initiating a Remote Monitor of that radio, etc. The Initiating an Emergency Call Note:

If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode until you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not initially display any audio or visual indicators that the radio is in Emergency mode. However, your radio un-

mutes for the transmissions of radios responding to your emergency. The emergency indicators only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission from your radio. For both Silent and Silent with Voice operation, the radio automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call is finished. 1 Press the programmed Emergency button. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 189 English 3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call continues for the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time. If you press the PTT button during this time, the Emergency call continues. Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. When enabled for this operation, when you press the programmed Emergency button, and when your radio receives the time slot assignment, the microphone is automatically activated without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. The hot mic applies to the first voice transmission from your radio during the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. 1 Press the programmed Emergency button. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 190 English 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 The microphone remains active for the hot mic time specified in your radio's codeplug programming. During this time, the LED lights up green. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer than the programmed duration. Initiating an Emergency Alert Note: If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent with Voice, it will not provide any audio or visual indications that it is sending an Emergency Alert. If programmed for Silent, the silent operation continues indefinitely until you press PTT or the button configured for Emergency Off. If programmed for Silent with Voice, the radio automatically cancels silent operation when the site controller broadcasts the Emergency Alert. Press the orange Emergency button. Upon transmitting the Emergency Alert to the site controller, the radios display shows the Emergency icon, the Group contact used for the Emergency Alert, and TX Alarm. Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sent and is being broadcast for other radios to hear, a positive indicator tone sounds and the radios display shows Alarm Sent. If the Emergency Alert is unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the radio displays Alarm Failed. Exiting Emergency Mode Note: If the Emergency call ends due to the expiration of the Emergency Hang Time, but the emergency condition is not over, press the Emergency button again to restart the process. If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio automatically exits Emergency mode after receiving a response from the Connect Plus system. If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio will be assigned a channel automatically when one becomes available. Once your radio has transmitted a message indicating the emergency, you cannot cancel your Emergency call. However, if you pressed the button by accident or the emergency no longer exists, you may wish to say this over the assigned channel. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires. If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voice to Follow, use the hot mic period to explain your error, then press and release the PTT button to discontinue the transmission. The Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires. Text Message Features Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. The maximum length of characters for a text message, including the subject line (seen when receiving message from a text message application), is 140. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Any text message in the writing/editing screen will automatically be saved to the Drafts folder. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 191 English Note: Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Writing and Sending a Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Program med Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or press to Messages and to select. 2 or to Compose and press to select. A blinking cursor appears. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. to change text entry or 4 Press once message is composed. 5 If you are sending the message, select the recipient by or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. 3 Use the keypad to type your message. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 192 English If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 197). Sending a Quick Text Message Your radio supports a maximum of 10 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Program med Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 to access the menu. Radio Controls Steps 2 or press to Messages and to select. or to Quick Text and press to select. to the required Quick Text and press or to select. A blinking cursor appears. 2 3 4 Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. to change text entry or A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 5 Press once message is composed. 193 English again to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder. Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button 6 Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-

edit, or delete the newly composed message, do one of the following. to Send, and press to send the or message. or to Save, and press message to the Drafts folder. to save the to edit the message. 7 If you are sending the message, select the recipient by or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 194 English The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 197). Press the programmed One Touch Access button to send a predefined Quick Text message to a predefined alias or ID. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 197). Accessing the Drafts Folder You can save a text message to send it at a later time. If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen while you are in the process of writing or editing a text message, your current text message is automatically saved to the Drafts folder. The most recent saved text message is always added to the top of the Drafts list. The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note:

Long press screen. at any time to return to the Home Viewing a Saved Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. to Messages or to select. and press 2 3 or to Drafts and press to select. or to select. to the required message and press A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to Edit and press to select. 195 English A blinking cursor appears. 3 Use the keypad to type your message. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. to change text entry or 4 Press once message is composed. 5 Select the message recipient by or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved to the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send Failed icon. Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. to Messages or to select. and press 2 or to Drafts and press to select. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. 196 English or to select. to the required message and press Forwarding a Text Message Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/ group alias or ID. Press again while viewing the message. 1 or to Forward and press to select. 3 4 5 or to Delete and press text message. Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages to delete the 2 or to the required alias or ID and press to select. You can select one of the following options while at the Resend option screen:

Resend Forward Edit Resending a Text Message to resend the same message to the Press same subscriber/group alias or ID. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, the display shows negative mini notice. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. The display shows Sending Msssage, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 197 English Editing a Text Message Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. Note: If a subject line is present (for messages received from a text message application), you cannot edit it. 1 or to Edit and press to select. A blinking cursor appears. 2 Use the keypad to edit your message. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. to change text entry or 3 Press once message is composed. 4 Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-

edit, or delete the newly composed message, do one of the following. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 198 English or message. to Send, and press to send the or to Save, and press message to the Drafts folder. to save the to edit the message. again to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder. 5 If you are sending the message, select the recipient by or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. Managing Sent Text Messages Radio Controls Message button Menu Steps 1 2 to access the menu. or press to Messages and to select. Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items list. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note: Long press Home screen. Viewing a Sent Text Message at any time to return to the 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Program med Text Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 2 3 or to Sent Items and press to select. or to the required message and press to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from a text message application. The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item Icons on page 158). Sending a Sent Text Message You can select one of the following options while viewing a sent text message:

199 English Resend Forward Edit Delete 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to one of the options described next and press Option Forward Edit Delete to select. Steps Select Forward to send the selected text message to another subscriber/

group alias or ID (see Forwarding a Text Message on page 197). Select Edit to edit the selected text message before sending it (see Editing a Text Message on page 198). Select Delete to delete the text message. Option Resend Steps Select Resend to resend the selected text message to the same subscriber/group alias or ID. The display shows Sending Message, confirming that the same message is being sent to the same target radio. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. Press the message to the same subscriber/group alias or ID. Note: If you exit the message sending screen while the message to resend

. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 200 English Option Steps is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. Note: If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In- Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. Note: The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-

Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-

Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. to Messages or to select. and press A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 201 English 2 3 or to Sent Items and press to select. When you select Sent Items and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 129). or to Delete All and press to select. Read Later Delete Reading a Text Message 1 or to Read? and press to select. Selected message in the Inbox opens. A subject line may be shown if the message is from a text message application. 4 Choose one of the following. 2 Do one of the following:

or to Yes and ppress to select. The display shows positive mini notice. or to No and press to return to the previous screen. Receiving a Text Message When your radio receives a message, the display shows the Notification List with the alias or ID of the sender and the Message icon. You can select one of the following options when receiving a text message:

Read Press to return to the Inbox. Press delete the text message. a second time to reply, forward, or Managing Received Text Messages Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30 messages. Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to the most recently received. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 202 English Your radio supports the following options for text messages:

Reply Forward Delete Delete All Note: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or delete all Received messages. Note: Long press Home screen. Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox at any time to return to the 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. or or to Inbox and press to select. toview the messages. A subject line may be shown if the message is from a text message application. 5 Do one of the following:

Press press or delete that message. to select the current message, and again to reply, quick reply, forward, Long press screen. to return to the Home Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Program med Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 to access the menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 203 English Radio Controls Steps 2 or press to Messages and to select. or to Inbox and press to select. or to the required message and press to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from a text message application. Press once more to access the sub-menu. 2 3 4 5 Do one of the following:

or to Reply and press to select. or select. to Quick Reply and press to A blinking cursor appears. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 204 English 6 Use your keypad to write/edit your message. 7 once message is composed. Press The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent,a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 197). Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 to access the menu. Radio Controls Steps 2 or to Messages to select. and press 2 3 4 5 6 or to Inbox and press to select. or to the required message and press to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from a text message application. Press once more to access the sub-menu. or to Delete and press to select. or to Yes and press to select. The display shows Message Deleted, and the screen returns to the Inbox. Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages to select. and press or to Inbox and press to select. When you select Inbox and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 129). or to Delete All and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. or to Yes and press to select. The display shows Inbox Cleared. 2 3 4 205 English Privacy If enabled, this feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the current channel selector position to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel selector position, the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled) transmissions. Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy). If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the Home screen shows the Secure or Unsecure icon, except when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency call or alarm. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. You can access this feature by Pressing the programmed Privacy button to toggle privacy on or off. Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps described next. Note: Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or or to Utilities and press to select. to Radio Settings or or to Connect Plus and press to select. or to Enhanced Privacy. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 206 English If the display shows Turn On, press to enable Privacy. The radio displays a message confirming your selection. OR If the display shows Turn Off, press to disable Privacy. The radio displays a message confirming your selection. If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the secure or unsecure icon appears on the status bar, except when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency Alert. Making a Privacy-Enabled (Scrambled) Call Toggle privacy on using the programmed privacy button or by using the menu. Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled for the currently selected channel position to send a privacy-enabled transmission. When privacy is enabled for the currently selected channel position, all voice transmissions made by your radio will be scrambled. This includes Group Call, Multigroup Call, talk-back during scanned calls, Site All Call, Emergency Call, and Private Call. Only receiving radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. Security You can enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, you might want to disable a stolen radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable that radio, when it is recovered. Note: Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited to radios with these functions enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Radio Disable 1 Access this feature by A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. Steps Radio Controls Radio Disable button 1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button. 2 or to the required alias or ID and press to select. 207 English Steps Radio Controls Steps 1 2 to access the menu. or press are alphabetically sorted. to Contacts and to select. The entries 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID select the required alias or ID directly or to the required 4 or to Radio Number and press select. to The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter the subscriber alias or ID and press

. or to Radio Disable and press to select. alias or ID and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu or to Manual to Dial and press select. The display shows Radio Disable: <Target Alias or ID> and the LED blinks green. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Disable Successful. Radio Controls Radio menu

. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 208 English If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Disable Failed. Radio Controls Steps Radio Enable 1 Access this feature by Steps Radio Controls Radio Enable button Radio menu 2 1 2 1 Press the programmed Radio Enable button. or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to select. The entries are to Contacts and press alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID select the required alias or ID directly or to the required alias or ID and press select. to use the Manual Dial menu or to Manual Dial and press to select. or to Radio Number and press select. to The first line of the display shows Radio Number: . the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter the subscriber alias or ID and press

. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 209 English Radio Controls Steps 4 or press to Radio Enable and to select. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Enable Successful. If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Enable Failed. Password Lock Features If enabled, this feature only allows you access your radio if the correct password is entered upon powering up. Accessing the Radio from Password 1 Power up your radio. You hear a continuous tone. 2 Do one of the following:

Enter your current four-digit password with the

. Press radios keypad. The display shows to proceed. or

. Press to remove the each Each digit changes to next digit. Press Enter your current four-digit password. Press to edit each digits numeric value. to move to to confirm your selection. You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit on the entered. Press display. You hear a negative indicator tone, if you press more than four digits. If the password is correct, your radio proceeds to power up. See Powering Up the Radio on page 25. If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password. Repeat Step 2 on page 210. After the third incorrect password, the display shows Wrong Password and then, shows Radio when the line is empty, or if you press

. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 210 English Locked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow. Note: The radio is unable to receive any call, including emergency calls, in locked state. Unlocking the Radio from Locked State 1 If your radio was powered down after being in the locked state, power up the radio. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow. The display shows Radio Locked. 2 Wait for 15 minutes. Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for locked state when you power up. 3 Repeat Steps 1 on page 210 and 2 on page 210 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 210. Turning the Password Lock On or Off 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 3 4 or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Passwd Lock and press to 5 Enter the four-digit password. See Step 2 on page 210 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 210. 6 to proceed. Press If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the previous menu. 7 If the password entered in the previous step is to enable/disable password correct, press lock. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 211 English Changing the Password 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Passwd Lock and press to 5 Enter the four-digit password. See Step 2 on page 210 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 210. 6 to proceed. Press If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the previous menu. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 212 English 7 If the password entered in the previous step is to Change Pwd and press or correct, to select. 8 Enter a new four-digit password. See Step 2 on page 210 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 210. 9 Reenter the previously entered four-digit password. See Step 2 on page 210 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 210. 10 to proceed. Press If the reentered password matches the new password entered earlier, the display shows Password Changed. If the reentered password does NOT match the new password entered earlier, the display shows Passwords Do Not Match. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Bluetooth Operation This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth enabled device (accessory) via a wireless Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-

Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight.This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound garbled or broken. To correct this problem, simply position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to reestablish clear audio reception. Your radios Bluetooth function has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-

meter/32 feet range. Your radio can support up to 4 simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual for more details on your Bluetooth-

enabled devices full capabilities. Turning Bluetooth On and Off 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to My Status and press to select. The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a

. 4 Do one of the following:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. or to On and press display shows On and a selected status. to select. The appears left of the 213 English or to Off and press display shows Off and a selected status. to select. The appears left of the Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device 6 Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press operation as this cancels the operation. during the finding and connecting 1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-

enabled devices user manual. 2 3 4 On your radio, press to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

or to select. to the required device and press

. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 214 English or devices. press to Find Devices to locate available or to the required device and to select. or to Connect and press to select. Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. appears besides If successful, the radio display shows <Device>

Connected. A tone sounds and the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon appears on the status bar. If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting Failed . Note: If pin code is required, use the same entry method as Step 2 on page 210 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 210. Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode) Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the finding and connecting operation as this may cancel the operation. 1 Turn Bluetooth On. See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 123. 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Find Me and press to select. Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-

enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device 1 2 3 4 5 On your radio, press to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. or select. to the required device and press to or to Disconnect and press to select. Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it with your radio. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A positive indicator tone sounds and beside the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon disappears on the status bar. disappears 215 English Switching Audio Route You can toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Radio. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Bluetooth. Viewing Device Details 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. or select. to the required device and press to 5 or select. to View Details and press to Editing Device Name You can edit the name of available Bluetooth-enabled devices. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. or select. to the required device and press to or to Edit Name and press to select. to move one space to the left. Press Press move one space to the right. Press to to delete

. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 216 English any unwanted characters. Long press change text entry method. A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type the required zone. to 7 The display shows Device Name Saved. Deleting Device Name You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. or select. to the required device and press to or to Delete and press to select. The display shows Device Deleted. Bluetooth Mic Gain Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled devices microphone gain value. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or select. or values. to BT Mic Gain and press to to the BT Mic Gain type and the current To edit values, press to select. or press to increase or to decrease values and to select. Notification List Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your unread events on the channel, such as unread text messages, missed calls, and call alerts. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 217 English The Notification icon appears on the status bar when the Notification List has one or more events. The list supports a maximum of forty (40) unread events. When it is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest event. Note: After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification List. Accessing the Notification List Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts

(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if needed. Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Notification and press to to the required event and press to Long press to return to the Home Screen. Utilities 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to or to All Tones and press to select. Press to enable/disable all tones and alerts. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 218 English The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. beside Enabled. The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. beside Enabled. Turning Keypad Tones On or Off Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to to Keypad Tones and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected Press to enable/disable keypad tones. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/

alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to to Vol. Offset and press to 1 2 3 4 5 6 or to the required volume value. 219 English The radio sounds a feedback tone with each corresponding volume value. 7 Do one of the following:

Press volume value. to keep the required displayed Press current volume offset settings. to exit without changing the Repeat Step 6 on page 219 to select another volume value. Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if needed. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to

. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 220 English 4 5 6 or select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to to Talk Permit and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable the Talk Permit Tone. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Changing the Display Mode You can change radios display mode between Day or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of the display. Change the Display Mode Radio Control Steps Programmed Display Mode Button Press the programmed Display Mode button. Radio Control Steps Menu 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or press or to Utilities and to select. to Radio to Settings and press select. or press The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. to Display and to select. Note: You can also use to change the selected or option. or to the required setting and press enable. selected setting. appears besides to Adjusting the Display Brightness You can adjust radios display brightness as needed. Note: Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto Brightness is enabled. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Display and press to select. or to Brightness and press The display shows a progress bar. to select. l P u s

. Decrease display brightness by pressing increase the display brightness by pressing Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press your entry. or

. to confirm 221 English Controlling the Display Backlight You can enable or disable the radios display backlight as needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly. Press the programmed Backlight button to toggle the backlight settings, or follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. The display backlight and keypad backlighting are automatically turned off if the LED indicator is disabled (see Turning the LED Indicator On or Off on page 138). to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable the display backlight. 5 Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Locking and Unlocking the Keypad You can lock your radios keypad to avoid inadvertent key entry. To lock/unlock your radios keypad. Option Locking the Keypad Steps 1 2 to access the menu. or press or to Utilities and to select. to Radio Settings or select. to Radio Settings and press to 3 or to Backlight and press to select. and press to select. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 1 2 3 4 222 English Option Steps 4 or press to Keypad Lock and to select. You can also use to change the selected option. or 3 4 5 or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Languages and press to select. or to enable. to the required language and press appears beside selected language. Unlocking the Keypad Press followed by

. After the keypad is locked, the display shows Keypad Locked and returns to the Home screen. After the keypad is unlocked, the display shows Keypad Unlocked and returns to the Home screen. Language You can set your radio display to be in your required language. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. Turning the LED Indicator On or Off You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if needed. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to LED Indicator and press to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 223 English to enable/disable the LED Indicator. 5 Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. s u P l Identifying Cable Type You can select the type of cable your radio uses. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Cable Type and press to select. At Step 4, you can also use selected option. or to change the Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current Zone or Channel the user has just assigned, or programmable button press. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or to select. to Radio Settings and press to to Voice Announcement and press You can also use option. or to change the selected 5 The current cable type is indicated by a 5 Do one of the following:

t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 224 English Press display shows to enable Voice Announcement. The beside Enabled. Press to disable Voice Announcement. The disappears from beside Enabled. Wallpaper Mode Your radio displays the Wallpaper background on home screen. The user can select from 5 default wallpapers. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Display and press to select. or to Wallpaper and press to select. You can also use option. or to change the selected Screen Saver Mode The screen saver feature allows the radio to save radio battery time. A Screen Saver Pre Duration is used to track the radio activities before entering screen saver mode. Radio starts Screen Saver Pre Duration upon power up. Radio enters into screen saver mode when Screen Saver Pre Duration timer expires, the radio exits screen saver mode and responds to related transaction normally upon any user input and over the air transaction. Radio restarts Screen Saver Pre Duration upon any user input and over the air transaction. After being in Screen Saver mode for 5 seconds, radio enters keypad lock state automatically. When any audio or Bluetooth accessory is connected, battery saver mode is enabled, radio enters screen saver mode. If there is any user input or over the air transaction, the radio exits screen saver mode and responds to user interaction. The Screen Saver Pre Duration A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 225 English is restarted and the radio goes back to screen saver mode when it expires. Note: The screen saver mode is to help improve battery life. Audio Accessory The audio accessory has two modes: Normal and Battery Saver mode. When audio accessory is plugged in and the setting is in Battery Saver Mode, the radio restarts the timer and goes into screen saver mode. In this scenario, when there is any user input (including user input on radio and accessory attachment/detachment) or when receiving emergency alarm/call, the radio exits screen saver mode and responds to user event as normal. The Screen Saver timer restarts and the radio goes back to screen saver mode when the time allocated expires. Note: This battery saver mode is to improve battery life. See Screen Saver box SRS for more details in this mode. Auto Keypad Lock You can enable/disable your radios auto keypad lock to avoid inadvertent key entry. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 226 English 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Auto Keypad Lock and press to 5 Do one of the following:

Press display shows to enable Auto Keypad Lock. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Auto Keypad Lock. The Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D) This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected or to Mic AGC-D and press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Mic AGC-D. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Mic AGC-D. The Intelligent Audio Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume to overcome background noise in the environment, inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and does not affect Transmit audio. Note: This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session. 1 to access the menu. Radio Control Menu Steps 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or press or press or to Radio Settings and to select. to Radio Settings and to select. to Intelligent Audio and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. Note: You can also use change the selected option. or 5 Do one of the following:

to 227 English Radio Control Steps to enable Intelligent Press Audio. The display shows beside Enabled. Press Audio. The beside Enabled. to disable Intelligent disappears from 2 3 4 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or to select. to Radio Settings and press to to Intelligent Audio and press 5 Do one of the following:

Press display shows to enable Intelligent Audio. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Intelligent Audio. The See Accessories on page 245 for recommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessories with in-built Automatic Volume Control for similar performance. Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. Toggle Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Features On or Off Radio Control Steps Programmed Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Button Menu Press the programmed Acoustic Feedback Suppressor button. 1 to access the menu. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 228 English Radio Control Steps Radio Control Steps 2 3 4 or press or to Utilities and to select. to Radio Settings and press select. or to AF to Suppressor and press to select. Note: You can also use to change the selected or option. 5 Do one of the following:

Press to enable Acoustic Feedback Suppressor. The display shows beside Enabled. Press to disable Acoustic Feedback Suppressor. The disappears from beside Enabled. Text Entry Configuration You can configure the following settings for entering text on your radio:

Word Predict Word Correct Sentence Cap My Words Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

Numbers Symbols Predictive or Multi-Tap Language (If programmed) A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 229 English to return to the at any time to return to the Note: Press previous screen or long press Home Screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Word Predict Your radio can learn common word sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the next word you may want to use after you enter the first word of a common word sequence into the text editor. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Text Entry and press to select. or select. to Word Predict and press to

. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 230 English You can also use option. or to change the selected 6 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Word Predict. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Word Predict. The Word Correct Supplies alternative word choices when the word entered into the text editor is not recognized by the in-

built dictionary. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Text Entry and press to select. 5 or select. to Word Correct and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected 6 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Word Correct. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Word Correct. The Sentence Cap Automatically enables capitalization for the first letter in the first word for every new sentence. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to 4 5 or to Text Entry and press to select. or select. to Sentence Cap and press to 6 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Sentence Cap. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Sentence Cap. The Viewing Custom Words You can add your own custom words into your radios in-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list to contain these words. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 231 English 3 4 5 6 or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Text Entry and press to select. or to My Words and press to select. to List of Words and press or select. Display shows the list of custom words. to Editing Custom Word You can edit the custom words saved in your radio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Text Entry and press to select. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 232 English 5 6 7 8 or to My Words and press to select. to List of Words and press or select. Display shows the list of custom words. to or select. to the required word and press to or to Edit and press to select. 9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted or Press the Press the characters. Long press method. Press completed. to change text entry once your custom word is The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Adding Custom Word You can add your own custom words into your radios in-built dictionary. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Text Entry and press to select. or to My Words and press to select. to Add New Word and press or select. Display shows the list of custom words. to 7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted or Press the Press the characters. Long press method. Press completed. to change text entry once your custom word is The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Deleting a Custom Word You can delete the custom words saved in your radio. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 233 English 3 4 5 6 7 or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Text Entry and press to select. or to My Words and press to select. or select. to the required word and press to or to Delete and press to select. 8 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes. or to No and press to return to the previous screen. Deleting All Custom Words You can delete all custom words from your radios in-

built. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 234 English 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Text Entry and press to select. or to My Words and press to select. or to Delete All and press to select. 7 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes. or to No and press to return to the previous screen. Accessing General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:

Battery Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer) Radio Model Number Index Option Board Over-the-Air (OTA) Codeplug CRC Site Number Site Info Radio Alias and ID Firmware and Codeplug Versions Open-Source Software Information at any time to return to the previous to return to the Home Press screen or long press screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Accessing the Battery Information Displays information on your radio battery. 4 to to Battery Info and press or select. The display shows the battery information. For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display reads Recondition Battery if the battery requires reconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After the reconditioning process, the display then shows the battery information. Checking the Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer) Note: The measurement on the display shows the degree of tilt at the moment you press to accept the Accelerometer option. If you change the angle of the radio after pressing

, the radio does not change the measurement shown on its display. It continues to display the measurement taken when 1 2 3 to access the menu. was pressed. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. If the portable radio has been enabled for the Man Down Alarms, there is a menu option to check how the radio measures the degree of tilt. This is a helpful feature when the dealer or Radio System Administrator uses the MOTOTRBO Connect Plus A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 235 English Option Board CPS programming software to configure the activation angle that will trigger the tilt alarm. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. 4 Tilt the radio at the angle that triggers the Tilt Alarm. 5 to to Accelerometer and press or select. The display shows the radios angle of tilt

(deviation from perpendicular vertical position) in degrees (example: 62 Deg.) Based on this, use MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS to configure the Activation Angle for 60 degrees

(which is the closest programmable value). The Tilt Alarm timers are triggered when the Activation Angle is 60 degrees, or greater. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 236 English Checking the Radio Model Number Index This index number identifies your radios model-

specific hardware. Your radio system administrator may ask for this number when preparing a new Option Board codeplug for your radio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. to Model Index and press or select. The display shows the Model Number Index. to Checking the CRC of the Option Board OTA Codeplug File Follow the instructions below if your radio system administrator asks you to view the Option Board OTA Codeplug File CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). This menu option only appears if the Option Board received its last codeplug update OTA. to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 to OB OTA CPcrc and press or select. The display shows some letters and numbers. Communicate this information to your radio system administrator exactly as shown. to Displaying the Site ID (Site Number) Note: If you are not currently registered at a site, the display shows Not Registered. The radio briefly shows the Site ID as it registers with a Connect Plus site. Following registration, the radio does not generally indicate the Site number. To display the registered Site number, do the following:

1 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. to Site Number and press or select. The display shows the Network ID and the Site Number. to Checking the Site Info Note: If you are not currently registered at a site, the display shows Not Registered. The Site Info feature provides information that can be useful to a service technician. It consists of the following information:

Repeater number of current Control Channel repeater. RSSI: Last signal strength value measured from Control Channel repeater. Neighbor List sent by Control Channel repeater

(five numbers separated by commas). A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 237 English If you are requested to use this feature, please report the displayed information exactly as it appears on the screen. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. or to Site Info and press to select. The display shows the Site Info. Checking the Radio ID This feature displays the ID of your radio. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio screen. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 238 English 3 4 or to Radio Info and press to select. or to My ID and press The display shows the radio ID. to select. Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version Displays the firmware version on your radio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. or to Versions and press to select. The display a list with the following information:

(Radio) Firmware Version

(Radio) Codeplug Version Option Board Firmware Version Option Board Frequency Version Option Board Hardware Version Option Board Codeplug Version Checking for Updates Connect Plus provides the ability to update certain files (Option Board Codeplug, Network Frequency File and Option Board Firmware File) over-the-air. Note: Check with the dealer or network administrator to determine whether this feature has been enabled for your radio. Any display Connect Plus radio has the ability to show its current Option Board OTA Codeplug CRC, Frequency File version or Option Board firmware file version via a menu option. In addition, display radios that have been enabled for over-the-air file transfer can display the version of a "pending file". A "pending file" is a Frequency File or Option Board firmware file that the Connect Plus radio knows about via system messaging, but the radio has not yet collected all of the files packets. If a display Connect Plus radio has a pending file, the menu provides options to:

See the version number of the pending file See what percentage of packets has been collected so far Request the Connect Plus radio to resume collecting file packets If the radio is enabled for Connect Plus over-the-air file transfer, there may be times when the radio automatically joins a file transfer without first notifying the radio user. While the radio is collecting file packets, the LED rapidly blinks red and the radio displays the High Volume Data icon on the Home Screen status bar. Note: The Connect Plus radio cannot collect file packets and receive calls at the same time. If you wish to cancel the file transfer, press and release the PTT button. This causes the radio to request a call on the selected Contact Name, and it will also cancel the file transfer for that radio until the process resumes at a later time. There are several things that can make the file transfer process start again. The first example applies to all over-the-air file types. The other examples apply only to the Network Frequency File and Option Board Firmware File:

The radio system administrator re-initiates the over-the-air file transfer. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 239 English The Option Board's pre-defined timer expires, which causes the Option Board to automatically resume the process of collecting packets. The timer has not yet expired, but the radio user requests the file transfer to resume via the menu option. After the Connect Plus radio finishes downloading all file packets, it must upgrade to the newly acquired file. For the Network Frequency File, this is an automatic process and does not require a radio reset. For the Option Board Codeplug File, this is an automatic process that will cause a brief interruption to service as the Option Board loads the new codeplug information and re-acquires a network site. How quickly the radio upgrades to a new Option Board firmware file depends on how the radio has been configured by the dealer or system administrator. The radio will either upgrade immediately after collecting all file packets, or it will wait until the next time that the user turns the radio on. Note: Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. The process of upgrading to a new Option Board firmware file takes several seconds, and it requires the Connect Plus Option Board to reset the radio. Once the upgrade starts, the radio use will not be able to make or receive calls until the process is completed. Firmware File Firmware Up to Date Note: If the Option Board firmware file is not Up to Date (and if the radio has partially collected a more recent Option Board firmware file version) the radio displays a list with additional options; Version,

%Received, and Download. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. or to Updates and press to select. or to select. The display shows Firmware is Up to Date. to Firmware and press

. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 240 English Pending Firmware Version 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. or to Updates and press to select. or to Firmware and press to select. or to Version and press to select. If there is a pending Option Board firmware file, the display shows the pending firmware version number. If there is a pending Option Board firmware file, the display shows Firmware is Up to Date Pending Firmware % Received 1 to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 6 or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. or to Updates and press to select. or to Firmware and press to select. or to %Received and press to select. The screen displays the percentage of firmware file packets collected so far. Note: When at 100%, the radio needs to be power cycled Off and then On to initiate the firmware upgrade. Pending Firmware Download If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA Option Board Firmware File Transfer with a partial file, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Option Board Firmware File transfer prior to expiration of this A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 241 English internal timer, use the Download option as described below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. or to Updates and press to select. or to Firmware and press to select. or to Download and press to select. The display shows the following:

Download Available No Download Available Start Download Download not available 7 Do one of the following:

. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Select Yes and press to start the download. 242 English Select No and press previous menu. to return to the Frequency File Frequency File Up to Date Note: If the Frequency File is not Up to Date (and if the radio has partially collected a more recent frequency file version) the radio displays a list with additional options; Version, %Received, and Download. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. or to select. The display shows Freq. File is Up to Date. to Frequency and press Frequency File Pending Version 1 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 5 2 3 4 5 6 or to Radio Info and press to select. or to Updates and press to select. or to Frequency and press to select. or to Version and press to select. If there is a pending Frequency File, the display shows the pending Frequency File version number. Frequency File Pending % Received 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. or to Updates and press to select. or to %Received and press to select. The screen displays the percentage of frequency file packets collected so far. Frequency File Pending Download If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA Network Frequency File Transfer with a partial file, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Network Frequency File transfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, use the Download option as described below. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Info and press to select. or to Updates and press to select. or to Frequency and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s

. 243 English 6 or to Download and press to select. Download Currently Unavailable Download Currently Available Download not available Start Download 7 Do one of the following:

Select Yes and press to start the download. Select No and press to return to the previous menu. s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 244 English Accessories Antennas 420 445 MHz Stubby Antenna, (PMAE4076_) 438 470 MHz Stubby Antenna, (PMAE4077_) 403 425 MHz Stubby Antenna, (PMAE4078_) 450 490 MHz Stubby Antenna Kit, (PMAE4091_) 480 527 MHz Stubby Antenna Kit, (PMAE4092_) 806 870 MHz Stubby Antenna (PMAF4017_) 896 941 MHz Stubby Antenna (PMAF4018_) Audio Accessories Surveillance Earpiece with in-line microphone and PTT (PMLN5957_) Swivel Earpiece with in-line microphone and PTT

(PMLN5958_) Batteries Lithium-Ion 1800 mAH Battery Pack (HKNN4013_) 5 Not applicable to the 800/900 band. A c c e s s o r i e s Lithium-Ion 1370 mAH Battery Pack

(PMNN4425_) [5]

Bluetooth HK200 Bluetooth Headset (US) (89409_) Operations Critical Wireless Earpiece with 12 inch cable (US) (NNTN8125_) Operations Critical Wireless Earpiece with 9.5 inch cable (US) (NNTN8126_) Operations Critical Wireless Push-To-Talk POD

(US) (NNTN8127_) Cables Micro USB Programming Cable (25-124330-01R) Carry Devices Carry Holder (PMLN5956_) Wrist Strap (PMLN6074_) 245 English Chargers Multi-Unit Charger, US Plug (PMLN5916_) Micro USB Charger, US Plug (PMPN4009_) Micro USB Single-Unit Plug-In Charger

(SPN5547_) SL Series Tri-Unit Charger (PMLN6358_) Miscellaneous Accessories 1370 mAH Battery Cover (PMLN6000_) 1800 mAH Battery Cover (PMLN6001_) s e i r o s s e c c A 246 English Batteries and Chargers Warranty The Workmanship Warranty The workmanship warranty guarantees against defects in workmanship under normal use and service. All MOTOTRBO Batteries IMPRES Chargers

(Single-Unit and Multi-

Unit, Non-Display) IMPRES Chargers (Multi-

Unit with Display) Two (2) Years Two (2) Years One (1) Year The Capacity Warranty The capacity warranty guarantees 80% of the rated capacity for the warranty duration. Nickel Metal-Hydride

(NiMH) or Lithium-Ion (Li-

lon) Batteries 12 Months IMPRES Batteries, When Used Exclusively with IMPRES Chargers 18 Months B a t t e r i e s a n d C h a r g e r s W a r r a n t

. 247 English Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

SL Series Digital Portable Radios Product Accessories

(Excluding Batteries and Chargers) Two (2) Years One (1) Year MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 248 English operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y 249 English V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 250 English 1 any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. 2 the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. 251 English VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 252 English 68009554001_D_Backcover.fm Page 1 Tuesday, August 14, 2012 11:46 AM 68009554001_D_Backcover.fm Page 2 Tuesday, August 14, 2012 11:46 AM Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2011, 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. August 2012. www.motorolasolutions.com/slseries

*68009554001*

68009554001-H